Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
WELCOME TO MINI.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
MINI COUNTRYMAN PLUG-IN HYBRID.
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have
on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the
Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information
on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features
available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to
enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your MINI.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of
the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.
3
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTES
Information.............................................................................................................................. 8
QUICK REFERENCE
Your MINI at a glance........................................................................................................20
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit.................................................................................................................................... 40
Central Information Display (CID)..................................................................................44
Voice activation system.................................................................................................... 53
General settings................................................................................................................... 56
Owner's Manual media.......................................................................................................68
MINI eDRIVE........................................................................................................................70
Safety of the hybrid system..............................................................................................73
CONTROLS
Opening and closing........................................................................................................... 76
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel.................................................................................99
Transporting children safely..........................................................................................111
Driving..................................................................................................................................116
Displays................................................................................................................................138
Lights.................................................................................................................................... 161
Safety.....................................................................................................................................167
Driving stability control systems.................................................................................187
Driving comfort................................................................................................................. 191
Climate control...................................................................................................................211
Interior equipment............................................................................................................220
Storage compartments.....................................................................................................227
Cargo area............................................................................................................................230
4
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving.............................................................................. 240
Saving fuel...........................................................................................................................245
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle........................................................................................................ 252
Refueling..............................................................................................................................261
Fuel........................................................................................................................................264
Wheels and tires................................................................................................................266
Engine compartment........................................................................................................283
Engine oil.............................................................................................................................286
Coolant..................................................................................................................................290
Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 292
Replacing components.................................................................................................... 294
Breakdown assistance..................................................................................................... 305
Care........................................................................................................................................312
REFERENCE
Technical data.................................................................................................................... 320
Appendix..............................................................................................................................322
Everything from A to Z....................................................................................................324
© 2018 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 VI/18, 07 18 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via
the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
5
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
NOTES
Information ................................................................................................... 8
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a
particular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is pro-
vided in the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline,
differences may exist between the printed
Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the ap-
pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for
the vehicle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-
tainment, and Communication can be ob-
tained as printed book from the service cen-
ter.
The topics are also discussed in the
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Additional sources of informa-
tion
Dealer’s service center
A dealer’s service center will be glad to an-
swer questions at any time.
Internet
The Owner's Manual and general Informa-
tion about MINI, for example on technology,
are available on the Internet: www.mini-
usa.com.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in
the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual
can be displayed on the Control Display. Ad-
ditional information, refer to page 68.
MINI Motorer’s Guide app
The app specifically describes features and
functions found in the vehicle. The app can
be displayed on smartphones and tablets.
MINI Driver’s Guide Web
Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suita-
ble information for the selected vehicle. If
possible, only equipment and functions that
are actually installed in the vehicle will be
explained. Driver’s Guide Web can be dis-
played in any current browser.
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Symbol Meaning
Precautions that must be
followed in order to avoid the
possibility of injury to yourself
and to others as well as serious
damage to the vehicle.
Measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
Seite 8
NOTES Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Symbol Meaning
"..." Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with
the voice activation system..
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the
voice activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented
as numbered list. The steps must be carried
out in the defined order.
1. First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or
alternative possibilities are presented as list
with bullet points.
– First possibility.
– Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
This symbol on a vehicle component
indicates that further information on the
component is available in the Owner's
Manual.
The symbols on parts of the vehicle indicate
that incorrect use of high-voltage equip-
ment or of orange-colored high-voltage
components results in the risk of life-threat-
ening injury from electric shock.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models
and all standard, country-specific and op-
tional equipment that is offered in the
model series. Therefore, this Owner's
Manual also describes and illustrates fea-
tures and functions that are not available in
a vehicle, for example because of the se-
lected optional features or the country-spe-
cific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
For any options and equipment not descri-
bed in this Owner's Manual, refer to the
Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Your dealer’s service center is happy to an-
swer any questions that you may have
about the features and options applicable to
your vehicle.
Status of the Owner's Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con-
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue
to embody the highest quality and safety
standards. In rare cases, therefore, the fea-
tures described in this Owner's Manual may
differ from those in your vehicle.
Seite 9
Information NOTES
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline,
differences may exist between the printed
Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the ap-
pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for
the vehicle.
For Your Own Safety
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri-
sche Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft,
BMW AG.
Intended use
Follow the following when using the vehi-
cle:
– Owner's Manual.
– Information on the vehicle. Do not re-
move stickers.
– Technical vehicle data.
– The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
the vehicle is driven.
– Vehicle documents and statutory docu-
ments.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for
the operating conditions and registration
requirements applying in the country of
first delivery, also known as homologation.
If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ-
ent country it might be necessary to adapt
your vehicle to potentially differing operat-
ing conditions and registration require-
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with
the homologation requirements in a certain
country you may not be able to lodge war-
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further
information on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
WARNING
Improperly performed work on the vehicle
paint can lead to a failure or malfunction
of the radar sensors and thereby result in a
safety risk. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Have paint-
work or paintwork repairs on bumpers of
vehicles with radar sensors performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop only.
Advanced technology, e. g. the use of mod-
ern materials and high-performance elec-
tronics, requires suitable maintenance and
repair work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that you entrust corresponding pro-
cedures to a MINI dealer’s service center. If
you choose to use another service facility,
the manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends use of a facility that performs work,
for instance maintenance and repair, ac-
cording to MINI specifications with prop-
erly trained personnel, referred to in this
Owner's Manual as "another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop".
If work is performed improperly, for in-
stance maintenance and repair, there is a
risk of subsequent damage and related
safety risks.
Parts and accessories
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends the use of parts and accessory prod-
ucts approved by the manufacturer of the
MINI.
Seite 10
NOTES Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
on their use and installation are available
from a MINI dealer's service center.
MINI parts and accessories were tested by
the manufacturer of the MINI for their
safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.
The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants
genuine MINI parts and accessories.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
evaluate whether each individual product
from another manufacturer can be used
with MINI vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific of-
ficial approval was issued. The manufac-
turer of your vehicle does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for
MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California law requires vehicle manufactur-
ers provide the following warning:
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au-
tomobile components and parts, including
components found in the interior furnish-
ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi-
cals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and repro-
ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain or emit chemi-
cals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other re-
productive harm. Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer. Wash your hands
after handling. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in labo-
ratory animals. Always protect your skin
by washing thoroughly with soap and wa-
ter. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-
hicle.
WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals in-
cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing ex-
haust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-
ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-
hicle.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publica-
tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by
the following warranties:
– New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
– Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
– Federal Emissions System Defect War-
ranty.
– Federal Emissions Performance War-
ranty.
– California Emission Control System Lim-
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties
is listed in the Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models or in the War-
ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana-
dian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted
and designed to meet the particular operat-
ing conditions and homologation require-
ments in your country and continental re-
Seite 11
Information NOTES
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
gion in order to deliver the full driving
pleasure while the vehicle is operated under
those conditions. If you wish to operate
your vehicle in another country or region,
you may be required to adapt your vehicle
to meet different prevailing operating con-
ditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please con-
tact Customer Relations for further informa-
tion.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain
the road safety, operational reliability and
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance
measures:
– MINI Maintenance system.
– Service and Warranty Information Book-
let for US models.
– Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models.
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in se-
rious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
Data memory
General information
Electronic control devices are installed in
the vehicle. Electronic control units process
data they receive from vehicle sensors, self-
generate or exchange with each other. Some
control units are necessary for the vehicle
to function safely or provide assistance dur-
ing driving, for instance driver assistance
systems. Furthermore, control devices facil-
itate comfort or infotainment functions.
Information about stored or exchanged data
can be requested from the manufacturer of
the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam-
ple.
Personal reference
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehi-
cle identification number. Depending on the
country, the vehicle owner can be identified
with the vehicle identification number, li-
cense plate and corresponding authorities.
In addition, there are other options to track
data collected in the vehicle to the driver or
vehicle owner, e.g. via utilized services.
Operating data in the vehicle
Control units process data to operate the ve-
hicle.
For example, this includes:
– Status messages for the vehicle and its
individual components, e.g., wheel rota-
tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration,
transverse acceleration, engaged safety
belt indicator.
– Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature,
rain sensor signals.
The processed data is only processed in the
vehicle itself and generally volatile. The
data is not stored beyond the operating pe-
riod.
Electronic components, e.g. control units
and ignition keys, contain components for
storing technical information. Information
about the vehicle condition, component us-
age, maintenance requirements or faults
can be stored temporarily or permanently.
This information generally records the state
of a component, a module, a system, or the
environment, for instance:
– Operating states of system components,
e.g., fill levels, tire inflation pressure,
battery status.
Seite 12
NOTES Information
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– Malfunctions and faults in important
system components, for instance lights
and brakes.
– Responses by the vehicle to special sit-
uations such as airbag deployment or
engagement of the driving stability con-
trol systems.
– Information on vehicle-damaging
events.
The data is required to perform the control
device functions. Furthermore, it also
serves to recognize and correct malfunc-
tions, and helps the vehicle manufacturer to
optimize vehicle functions.
The majority of this data is transient and is
only processed within the vehicle itself.
Only a small share of the data is stored
event-related in event or fault memories.
When servicing, for instance during repairs,
service processes, warranty cases, and qual-
ity assurance measures, this technical infor-
mation can be read out from the vehicle to-
gether with the vehicle identification
number.
A dealer’s service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop can read
out the information. The socket for OBD On-
board Diagnosis required by law in the ve-
hicle is used to read out the data.
The data is collected, processed, and used
by the relevant organizations in the service
network. The data documents technical con-
ditions of the vehicle, helps with the identi-
fication of the fault, compliance with war-
ranty obligations and quality improvement.
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
monitoring duties to meet in line with prod-
uct liability law. To fulfill these duties, the
vehicle manufacturer needs technical data
from the vehicle. The data from the vehicle
can also be used to check customer claims
for warranty and guaranty.
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can
be reset when a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop performs repair or servicing work.
Data entry and data transfer into
the vehicle
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, com-
fort and individual settings can be stored in
the vehicle and modified or reset at any
time.
For example, this includes:
– Settings for the seat and steering wheel
positions.
– Suspension and climate control settings.
If necessary, data can be transferred to the
entertainment and communication system
of the vehicle, e.g. via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on
the respective equipment:
– Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated
multimedia system.
– Address book data for use in conjunc-
tion with an integrated hands-free sys-
tem or an integrated navigation system.
– Entered navigation destinations.
– Data on the use of Internet services.
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle
or is found on a device that has been con-
nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone,
USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is
stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at
any time.
This data is only transmitted to third parties
upon personal request as part of the use of
online services. This depends on the se-
lected settings for the use of the services.
Incorporation of mobile end devices
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mo-
bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in-
Seite 13
Information NOTES
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
stance smartphones, can be controlled via
the vehicle control elements.
The sound and picture from the mobile de-
vice can be played back and displayed
through the multimedia system. Certain in-
formation is transferred to the mobile de-
vice at the same time. Depending on the
type of incorporation, this includes, for in-
stance position data and other general vehi-
cle information. This optimizes the way in
which selected apps, for instance navigation
or music playback, work.
There is no further interaction between the
mobile device and the vehicle, for instance
active access to vehicle data.
How the data will be processed further is
determined by the provider of the particular
app being used. The extent of the possible
settings depends on the respective app and
the operating system of the mobile device.
Services
General information
If the vehicle has a wireless network con-
nection, this enables data to be exchanged
between the vehicle and other systems. The
wireless network connection is realized via
an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit
or via personal mobile devices brought into
the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This
wireless network connection enables 'online
functions' to be used. These include online
services and apps supplied by the vehicle
manufacturer or by other providers.
Services from the vehicle
manufacturer
Where online services from the vehicle
manufacturer are concerned, the corre-
sponding functions are described in the ap-
propriate place, for instance the Owner's
Manual or manufacturer's website. The rele-
vant legal information pertaining to data
protection is provided there too. Personal
data may be used to perform online serv-
ices. Data is exchanged over a secure con-
nection, for instance with the IT systems of
the vehicle manufacturer intended for this
purpose.
Any collection, processing, and use of per-
sonal data above and beyond that needed to
provide the services must always be based
on a legal permission, contractual arrange-
ment or consent. It is also possible to acti-
vate or deactivate the data connection as a
whole. That is, with the exception of func-
tions and services required by law such as
Assist systems.
Services from other providers
When using online services from other pro-
viders, these services are the responsibility
of the relevant provider and subject to their
data privacy conditions and terms of use.
The vehicle manufacturer has no influence
on the content exchanged during this proc-
ess. Information on the way in which per-
sonal data is collected and used in relation
to services from third parties, the scope of
such data, and its purpose, can be obtained
from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-
like situations, such as an air bag deploy-
ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-
cord such data as:
Seite 14
NOTES Information
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– How various systems in your vehicle
were operating.
– Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were fastened.
– How far, if at all, the driver was depress-
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
– How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
ing conditions and no personal data, for in-
stance name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the ve-
hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the spe-
cial equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification number
Engine compartment
The vehicle identification number can be
found in the engine compartment, on the
right-hand side of the vehicle.
Type label
The vehicle identification number can be
found on the type label, on the right-hand
side of the vehicle.
Seite 15
Information NOTES
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Windshield
The vehicle identification number can also
be found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles
owned and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in-
jury or death, you should immediately in-
form the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration NHTSA, in addition to noti-
fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box
1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227,
Telephone 1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of ve-
hicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You
can also obtain other information about mo-
tor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
Seite 16
NOTES Information
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Seite 17
Information NOTES
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
QUICK REFERENCE
Your MINI at a glance ............................................................................ 20
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Your MINI at a glance
Opening and closing
Buttons on the remote control
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
With automatic tailgate operation: open
the tailgate
4 Panic mode
Unlocking the vehicle
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, either only the
driver's door or all vehicle access points are
unlocked.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press
the button of the remote control again to
unlock the other vehicle access points.
Press and hold this button on the
remote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.
Locking the vehicle
Press button on the remote control.
All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons for the central locking
system
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Pressing the button locks the vehi-
cle if the front doors are closed.
Unlocking
Pressing the button unlocks the ve-
hicle.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Seite 20
QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without acti-
vating the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote
control with you, such as in your pants
pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the re-
mote control when it is in close proximity
or in the car's interior.
Unlocking the vehicle
On the driver's or front passenger's door
handle, press the button.
Locking the vehicle
On the driver's or front passenger's door
handle, press the button.
Opening and closing the tailgate with
no-touch activation
Concept
The tailgate can be opened and closed with
no-touch activation using the remote con-
trol you are carrying.
Performing the foot movement
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle
at approx. one arm's length away from
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di-
rection of travel and immediately pull it
back.
Tailgate
Opening
Unlock the vehicle and press the button on
the tailgate.
– Unlock the vehicle and press the button
on the tailgate.
Seite 21
Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– If carrying the remote control, press the
button on the tailgate.
– Press and hold button on the re-
mote control for approx. 1 sec-
ond.
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked.
Closing
Press button on the inside of the tailgate.
– Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of
the tailgate.
– Press button, arrow 2.
The vehicle will be locked after closing
the tailgate. The driver's door must be
closed for this purpose and the remote
control must be outside of the vehicle in
the area of the tailgate.
Seats, mirrors, and steering
wheel
Manually adjustable seats
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt
Electrically adjustable seats
1 Memory function
2 Lumbar support
3 Backrest tilt
4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Seite 22
QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Adjusting the head restraint
Height
– To raise: push the head restraint up.
– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-
itor
3 Folding in and out
Adjusting the steering wheel
In four directions
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seating
position.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory
function:
– Seat position.
– Exterior mirror position.
– Height of the Head-up Display.
Storing
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3. Press button. The LED in the
button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 on the
seat while the LED is illuminated. The
LED goes out.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automati-
cally.
Seite 23
Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a switch for set-
ting the seat or one of the memory buttons
is pressed.
While driving, the seat position adjustment
on the driver's side is interrupted after a
short time.
Displays and control elements
In the vicinity of the steering
wheel
1 Low beams, fog lights
2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig-
nal
3 Instrument cluster
4 Washer/wiper system
Indicator/warning lights
Instrument cluster
The indicator/warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when
the engine is started or the ignition is
switched on.
Driver's door
1 Safety switch
2 Power windows
3 Exterior mirrors
All around the selector lever
1 Selector lever
2 Controller with buttons
3 Parking brake
Central Information Display (CID)
Concept
The Central Information Display (CID) com-
bines the functions of a multitude of
switches. These functions can be operated
via the Controller or touchscreen.
Seite 24
QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to se-
lect menu items and enter the settings.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: open recently used
menus.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu for
navigation.
Open navigation map.
Open the previous display.
Open the Options menu.
Voice activation
Using the voice activation system
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol in the instrument cluster
indicates that the voice activation system is
active.
If no other commands are available, operate
the function via the Central Information
Display (CID).
Terminating the voice activation system
Press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Help on the voice activation system
– To have information on the operating
principle of the voice activation system
read out loud: ›General information on
voice control‹.
– To have help for the current menu read
out loud: ›Help‹.
Information on Emergency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to
initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily delay the es-
tablishment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button close to the in-
terior mirror.
Driving
Activating/deactivating drive-
ready state
Ignition on/off
– On: press the Start/Stop
button.
Most of the indicator/
warning lights light up for
a varied length of time.
– Off: press the Start/Stop button again.
All indicator lights go out.
– Radio-ready state: when the ignition is
switched off, press the ON/OFF button
Seite 25
Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
on the radio or when the engine is run-
ning, press the Start/Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power con-
sumers remain ready for operation.
Activating/deactivating drive-ready
state
Activating
1. Close the driver's door.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The drive-ready state is active: electric driv-
ing is possible, or the engine can be started.
Deactivating
1. Engage selector lever position P with
the vehicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the parking brake, if needed.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save
fuel. The system switches off the combus-
tion engine when conditions for electric
driving have been met. The ignition re-
mains switched on.
READY appears on the tachometer. If nec-
essary, the combustion engine starts auto-
matically.
Parking brake
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED and indicator light light up.
Releasing
Steptronic transmission: press the
switch while the brake is pressed or
selector lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Steptronic transmission
Selector lever positions
Parking position P.
Reverse R.
Neutral N.
Drive mode D.
Engage selector lever position P or R only
when the vehicle is stationary.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a drive mode or reverse, maintain
pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to start.
Selector lever lock
A lock prevents an inadvertent change from
selector lever position P to another selector
lever position and, depending on the trans-
mission version, inadvertent switching to
selector lever position P or R.
To release the lock: with the brake pedal de-
pressed, press the button on the front of the
selector lever, see arrow.
Seite 26
QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Steptronic transmission, Sport and
manual mode
Sport program:
Press the selector lever to the left out of se-
lector lever position D.
Manual mode:
– To shift down: press the selector lever
forward.
– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-
wards.
High beams, headlight flasher, turn
signal, roadside parking light
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
– High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low
beams are switched on.
– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-
row 2.
Turn signal
– On: press the lever past the resistance
point.
– Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist-
ance point.
– Off: press the lever past the resistance
point in the opposite direction.
– Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap
the lever up or down.
– Brief signaling: press the lever to the re-
sistance point and hold it there for as
long as you want the turn signal to flash.
Canada: roadside parking light
Illuminate the vehicle on one side.
– On: with the ignition switched off, press
the lever either up or down past the re-
sistance point for approx. 2 seconds.
– Off: briefly press the lever to the resist-
ance point in the opposite direction.
Seite 27
Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Lights and lighting
Light functions
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position
is reached.
– Resting position of the wipers: posi-
tion 0.
– Rain sensor: position 1.
– Normal wiper speed: position 2.
– Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Brief wipe and switching off
Press the lever down.
– Switching off: press the lever down until
it reaches its standard position.
– Brief wipe: press the lever down from
the standard position.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
To activate: press the lever up once from its
standard position, arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back into the
standard position.
Seite 28
QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Set interval or sensitivity of the rain
sensor
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
Canada: wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Switching on
Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-
ance point.
– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap
once beyond the resistance point.
Brief wipe and switching off
Press the lever down.
– To switch off fast wipe: press down
twice.
– To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
– Brief wipe: press down once.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Seite 29
Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Set interval or sensitivity of the rain
sensor
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
Climate control
Air conditioner
Button Function
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Recirculated-air mode.
Button Function
Control the air flow, manual.
Control the manual air dis-
tribution.
Windshield defroster.
Automatic climate control
Button Function
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
Recirculated-air mode.
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC/recirculated-
air mode.
Control the air flow, manual.
Air distribution, manual.
Seite 30
QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Button Function
Defrost and defog the win-
dows.
Windshield defroster.
Rear window defroster.
Infotainment
Radio
Control elements
1 Change waveband
2 Changing the entertainment source
3 Sound output on/off, volume
4 Change station/track
5 Programmable memory buttons
Navigation destination entry
Entering a destination via address
State/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. "State/Province?"
4. Move the Controller to the right to se-
lect the state from the list.
Entering the address
The address can be entered in any order.
Example: entering the address via the town/
city
1. "City/Postal code?"
2. Enter the town/city.
The list is narrowed down further with
each entry.
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select a town/city from the list.
5. If necessary, enter the street.
6. Select the street as you would the town/
city.
7. If necessary, enter a house number.
8. Select the symbol.
9. Select a house number or range of house
numbers from the list.
Starting destination guidance
"Start guidance"
If only the town/city was entered: destina-
tion guidance is started to the town/city
center.
Pairing the mobile phone
After the mobile phone is paired once with
the vehicle, the mobile phone can be oper-
ated using the Central Information Display
(CID), the steering wheel buttons and spo-
ken instructions.
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is
displayed on the Control Display.
5. Select the functions for which the mo-
bile phone is to be used.
Seite 31
Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
6. To perform additional steps on the mo-
bile phone, refer to the mobile phone
owner's manual: e.g., search for or con-
nect the Bluetooth device or a new de-
vice.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-
pears on the mobile phone display. Se-
lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-
trol number is displayed or the control
number must be entered.
– Compare the control number dis-
played on the Control Display with
the control number on the display of
the device.
Confirm the control number on the
device and on the Control Display.
– Enter and confirm the same control
number on the device and via the
Central Information Display (CID).
The device is connected and displayed
in the device list.
The mobile phone is connected and will ap-
pear at the top of the list of mobile phones.
Using the phone
Accepting a call
Incoming call can be accepted via the Cen-
tral Information Display (CID) or the button
on the steering wheel.
Via the Central Information Display (CID)
"Accept"
Via the button on the steering wheel
Press button.
Via the instrument cluster
Use the OK button on the steering wheel to
select: "Accept"
Dialing a number
1. "Communication"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the numbers individually.
4. Select the symbol.
If connection is to be set up via the addi-
tional phone:
1. Press button.
2. "Call via"
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a com-
patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri
voice operation and the Central Information
Display (CID).
Functional requirements
– Compatible iPhone.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
– Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
– Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice opera-
tion are switched on on the iPhone.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
– "Bluetooth®"
– "Apple CarPlay"
Seite 32
QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list.
Refueling
Charging the vehicle
Charging socket flap
The charging socket flap is located on the
left side of the vehicle.
Always keep charging socket clean and un-
obstructed.
Keep the charging socket flap closed when
the charging socket is not used.
Connecting the charging cable
To connect, engage selector lever posi-
tion P, deactivate drive-ready state, and un-
lock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, if
needed.
1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow.
2. Remove cover of the charging cable
plug, if needed.
3. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging
cable to the port on the charging station.
4. Insert the charging cable plug corre-
sponding to the charging socket, and
push it in until it engages.
Removing
When the vehicle is locked, the charging
cable is locked. Unlock the vehicle before
removing the cable.
If necessary, clean the area between charg-
ing socket flap and charging socket, for in-
stance from snow, before removing it.
1. Unlock the vehicle by remote control if
it is locked.
Charging cable is unlocked.
2. Press the release button on the handle,
arrow 1, and grasp the charging cable at
the gripping areas.
Seite 33
Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Charging process is interrupted.
3. Remove the charging cable from the
charging socket, arrow 2.
4. Put the charging socket lid back on.
5. Close the charging socket flap.
6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug,
if needed.
7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from
the household socket or Level 2 charg-
ing cable from the port on the charging
station as needed.
8. Stow the charging cable.
At a charging station, insert the perma-
nently installed charging cable in the
place provided for it.
Refueling
Tank venting
In the fuel tank, excess pressure can build
up due to gasoline vapors which are dissi-
pated before the fuel cap is opened.
The switch is located in the storage com-
partment of the driver's door.
1. Switch off drive-ready state.
2. Pull the switch to start the pres-
sure equalization.
The status of the tank venting is dis-
played in the instrument cluster. In rare
cases, the tank venting can last several
minutes.
If the tank venting has been completed,
a message is displayed in the instrument
cluster. The fuel filler flap is released for
opening.
3. Open the fuel filler flap.
If it is not possible to open the fuel filler
flap after tank venting, press the button
again.
If it is still not possible to open the fuel
filler flap even after the button has been
pressed, unlock the fuel filler flap man-
ually.
Fuel cap
1. Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap
to open it.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-
tached to the fuel filler flap.
Gasoline
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur
content.
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without
metallic additives.
Information on the recommended fuel grade
can be found in the Owner's Manual.
Seite 34
QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure values can be
found on the sign on the door pillar.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed:
– At least twice a month.
– Before embarking on an extended trip.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Electronic oil measurement
Requirements
A current measured value is available after
approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a
shorter trip, the status of the last, suffi-
ciently long trip is displayed.
Displaying the engine oil level
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
Adding engine oil
General information
Safely park the vehicle and switch off the
ignition and drive-ready state before adding
engine oil.
Adding
Only add engine oil when the message is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Observe the quantity to be added in the
message.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Observe recommended engine oil types.
Providing assistance
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located above the Control Dis-
play.
Seite 35
Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Breakdown assistance
MINI Roadside Assistance
This service can be reached around the
clock in many countries.
1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis-
tance is established.
A telephone number is displayed, if
needed. Select to dial the telephone
number on a connected mobile phone.
Seite 36
QUICK REFERENCE Your MINI at a glance
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Seite 37
Your MINI at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit ........................................................................................................ 40
Central Information Display (CID) ...................................................... 44
Voice activation system ......................................................................... 53
General settings ....................................................................................... 56
Owner's Manual media ........................................................................... 68
MINI eDRIVE ............................................................................................ 70
Safety of the hybrid system .................................................................. 73
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows 94
2 Exterior mirror operation 108
3 Buttons of the central locking sys-
tem 81
4 Lights
Front fog lights 164
Light switch 161
Lights off
Daytime running lights 163
Parking lights 161
Low beams 161
Seite 40
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Automatic headlight con-
trol 162
Cornering light 163
High-beam Assistant 163
Instrument lighting 165
5 Steering wheel buttons, left
Camera-based cruise control
on/off 191
Cruise control on/off 198
Cruise control: store speed
Pausing, continuing cruise
control
Cruise control: increase speed
Cruise control: reduce speed
Camera-based cruise control:
reduce distance
Camera-based cruise control:
increase distance
6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 125
High beams, head-
light flasher 125
High-beam Assistant 163
Canada: roadside parking
light 162
Onboard Computer 151
7 Instrument cluster 138
8 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 129
Rain sensor 130
Cleaning windows 127
Rear window wiper 128
Clean the rear window 128
9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Voice activation 53
Telephone
Confirm the selection 151
Move selection up 151
Move selection down 151
Increase volume
Reduce volume
10 Horn, entire surface
Seite 41
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
11 Adjust the steering wheel 110
12 Unlock hood 284
13 Operate the tailgate 85
14 Tank vent 261
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Hazard warning system 305
Intelligent Safety 178
2 Control Display 44
3 Radio/Multimedia
4 Glove compartment 227
5 Climate control 211
6 PDC Park Distance Con-
trol 200
Rearview camera 203
Parking assistant 206
eDRIVE 120
Starting/stopping the engine,
switching drive-ready state
modes and the ignition on/
off 116
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
187
MINI Driving Modes
switch 189
Seite 42
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
7 Steptronic transmission selector
lever 133
8 Controller with buttons 47
Controller with buttons 47
9 Parking brake 123
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request,
SOS 306
2 Indicator light, front-seat pas-
senger airbag 170
3 Reading lights 165
4 Ambient light 165
5 Panoramic glass sunroof 96
6 Interior lights 165
Seite 43
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Central Information Display (CID)
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Concept
The Central Information Display (CID) com-
bines the functions of a multitude of
switches. These functions can be operated
via the Controller or touchscreen.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information sys-
tems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is pos-
sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident. Only use the systems
or devices when the traffic situation al-
lows. As warranted, stop and use the sys-
tems and devices while the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Input and display
Letters and numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be-
tween entering upper and lower case letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Insert blank space.
Use voice activation.
Confirm entry.
Without navigation system
Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter
entered and letters may be added automati-
cally.
Entries are continuously compared with
data stored in the vehicle.
– Only those letters are offered during en-
try for which data is available.
– Destination search: place names can be
entered in all languages that are availa-
ble on the Control Display.
Activating/deactivating the
functions
Several menu items are preceded by a
checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether
the function is activated or deactivated. Se-
lecting the menu item activates or deacti-
vates the function.
Seite 44
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Status information
General information
The status field can be found in the upper
area of the Control Display. Status informa-
tion is displayed in the form of symbols.
Radio
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being re-
ceived.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular net-
work.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Cellular network is not available.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Entertainment
Symbol Meaning
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
The sound output has been
switched off.
Encrypted connection not ac-
tive.
Request for the current vehicle
position.
Checking the current vehicle po-
sition.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on
the right side of the split screen, for in-
stance information from the Onboard Com-
puter.
In the divided screen view, the so-called
split screen, this information remains visi-
ble even when switching to another menu.
Switching the split screen on/off
1. Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Seite 45
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Selecting the display
The display can be selected in menus,
where the split screen is supported.
1. Move the Controller to the right until
the split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. Select the desired setting.
Specifying the number of displays
It is possible to specify the number of dis-
plays.
1. Move the Controller to the right until
the split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. Move the Controller to the left.
Control elements
Overview
1 Control Display with touchscreen
2 Controller with buttons and, depending
on the equipment version, with touch-
pad
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 316.
In the case of very high temperatures on
the Control Display, for instance due to in-
tense solar radiation, the brightness may be
reduced down to complete deactivation.
Once the temperature is reduced, for in-
stance through shade or air conditioning,
the normal functions are restored.
Safety information
NOTICE
Objects in the area in the front of the Con-
trol Display can shift and damage the Con-
trol Display. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not place objects in the area
in front of the Control Display.
Switching on/off automatically
The Control Display is switched on automat-
ically after unlocking.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if
no operation is performed on the vehicle for
several minutes.
Switching on/off manually
The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
1. Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Press the Controller or any button on the
Controller to switch it back on again.
Seite 46
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Controller with navigation system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to se-
lect menu items and enter the settings.
Some functions of the Central Information
Display (CID) can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller, refer to
page 51:
Operation
– Turn.
– Press.
– Move in four directions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: open recently used
menus.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu for
navigation.
Open navigation map.
Open the previous display.
Open the Options menu.
Controller without navigation
system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to se-
lect menu items and enter the settings.
Some functions of the Central Information
Display (CID) can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller, refer to
page 51:
Operation
– Turn.
Seite 47
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– Press.
– Move in two directions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: open recently used
menus.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Button Function
Open the previous display.
Open the Options menu.
Operating with the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All Central Information Display (CID) func-
tions can be called up via the main menu.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the Controller until the desired
menu item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Seite 48
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"System settings", a new display appears.
– Move the Controller to the left.
Closes the current display and shows the
previous display.
– Press button.
The previous display opens.
– Move the Controller to the right.
New display is opened.
An arrow indicates that additional displays
can be opened.
Opening recently used menus
The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press button twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The Options menu consists of various areas:
– Screen settings, for instance "Split
screen".
– Control options for the selected main
menu, for instance for "Media/Radio".
– If applicable, further operating options
for the selected menu, for instance "Save
station".
Changing settings
Settings, such as brightness, can be entered.
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or
numbers.
2. : confirm entry.
Deleting
Symbol Function
Press the Controller: delete
letters or number.
or
Hold the Controller down: de-
lete all letters or numbers.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which there is an entry
are displayed at the left edge.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly.
All letters for which there are entries
are displayed on the left edge.
2. Select the first letter of the desired en-
try.
The first entry of the selected letter is
displayed.
Operating via touchscreen
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a
touchscreen.
Seite 49
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Touch screen with your fingers. Do not use
any objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on symbol.
The main menu is displayed.
All Central Information Display (CID) func-
tions can be called up via the main menu.
Selecting menu items
Tap desired menu item.
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays
can be opened.
– Swipe to the left.
– Tap arrow.
New display is opened.
Opening recently used menus
1. Tap on symbol.
2. Tap on symbol.
Changing settings
Settings such as brightness can be changed
via the touchscreen.
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. To create the desired setting:
– Slide in the selected field to the right
or left, until the desired setting is
displayed.
– , Tap on symbol.
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1. Touch the symbol on the touch-
screen.
A keyboard is displayed in the Control
Display.
2. Enter letters and numbers.
Deleting
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: delete the
letter or number.
Tapping and holding the symbol
for an extended period: delete all
letters or numbers.
Operating navigation map
The navigation map can be moved with the
touchscreen.
Seite 50
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Function Operation
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the
fingers.
Touchpad
General information
Some functions of the Central Information
Display (CID) can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller:
Selecting functions
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Touchpad"
4. Select the desired function.
– "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
– "Map": using the map.
– "Search fields": write letters without
selecting the list field.
– "Audio feedback": pronounces en-
tered letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at
the beginning. When entering, pay atten-
tion to the following:
– The system distinguishes between up-
per and lower-case letters and numbers.
To make entries, it may be necessary to
change between upper and lower-case
letters, numbers and characters, refer to
page 49.
– Enter characters as they are displayed
on the Control Display.
– Always enter associated characters,
such as accents or periods so that the
letter can be clearly recognized. The set
language determines what input is pos-
sible. Where necessary, enter special
characters via the Controller.
– To delete a character, swipe to the left
on the touchpad.
– To enter a blank space, swipe to the
right in the center of the touchpad.
– To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in
the upper area of the touchpad.
– To enter an underscore, swipe to the
right in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be
moved via the touchpad.
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate
direction.
Enlarge/
shrink map.
Drag in or out on the
touchpad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Programmable memory but-
tons
General information
The Central Information Display (CID) func-
tions can be stored on the programmable
memory buttons and called up directly, for
instance radio stations, navigation destina-
tions, phone numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Storing a function
1. Select the function via the Central Infor-
mation Display (CID).
2. Press and hold the desired but-
ton, until a signal sounds.
Seite 51
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately.
This means, for instance that the number is
dialed when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the
top edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments
1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously
for approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Seite 52
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Concept
Most functions displayed on the Control
Display can be operated by voice commands
via the voice activation system. The system
supports you with announcements during
input.
General information
– Functions that can only be used when
the vehicle is stationary can only be op-
erated via the voice activation system to
a limited extent.
– The system uses a special microphone
on the driver's side.
– ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes ver-
bal instructions to use with the voice ac-
tivation system.
– Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, em-
phasis, and speed.
– Always say commands in the language
of the voice activation system.
Functional requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that
is also supported by the voice activation
system so that the spoken commands can be
identified.
To set the language, refer to page 56.
Using the voice activation sys-
tem
Activating the voice activation
system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol in the instrument cluster
indicates that the voice activation system is
active.
No other commands may be available. In
this case, operate the function via the Cen-
tral Information Display (CID).
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Using a smartphone via voice
activation
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can
be used via voice activation.
Seite 53
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Activate voice command response on the
smartphone for this purpose.
1. Press and hold the button on
the steering wheel for approx. 3 sec-
onds.
Voice command response is activated on
the smartphone.
2. Release the button.
If activation is successful, a confirma-
tion appears on the Control Display.
If it was not possible to activate voice com-
mand response, the list of Bluetooth devices
appears on the Control Display.
Possible commands
General information
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be
spoken.
You may select list entries such as phone
list entries via voice activation. Read these
list entries out loud exactly as they are
shown in the respective list.
Displaying possible commands
The following is displayed in the top area of
the Control Display:
– Some possible commands for the current
menu.
– Some possible commands from other
menus.
– Status of the voice recognition.
– Encrypted connection is not availa-
ble.
Help on the voice activation system
– To have information on the operating
principle of the voice activation system
read out loud: ›General information on
voice control‹.
– To have help for the current menu read
out loud: ›Help‹.
Example: opening the tone set-
tings
The commands of the menu items are spo-
ken just as they are selected via the Con-
troller.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound out-
put, if needed.
2. Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Media and radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Settings
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dia-
log or a short version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Seite 54
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Activating voice recognition via
the server
The voice recognition feature via the server
provides a dictation function and a natural
method of entering destinations while im-
proving the quality of voice recognition. To
use the functions, data is transmitted to a
service provider via an encrypted connec-
tion and stored locally there.
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition"
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of
the voice activation system. The function
can be deactivated if inquiries are often un-
desirably interrupted, for instance due to
background noise or talking.
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speaking during voice output"
Setting the language
The language to be used for voice activation
and system announcements can be set.
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired language.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken
instructions until the desired volume is set.
– The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is
changed.
– The volume is stored for the profile cur-
rently used.
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to
initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily delay the es-
tablishment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 306, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
– Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun-
roof closed to prevent noise interfer-
ence.
– Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 55
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
General settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Language
Setting the language
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 54.
Time
Setting the time zone
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Setting the time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired
hours are displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-
nutes are displayed.
8. Press the Controller.
Setting the time format
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Seite 56
AT A GLANCE General settings
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Date
Setting the date
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day
is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Make the settings for the month and
year.
Setting the date format
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Setting the units of measure-
ment
You can set the units of measurement for
some values, for example, fuel consumption,
distances and temperature.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Activating/deactivating the
display of the current vehicle
position
Concept
If vehicle location has been activated, the
current vehicle position can be displayed in
the MINI Connected app.
Activating/deactivating
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
5. Select the desired setting.
Activating/deactivating
popup windows
For some functions, popup windows are dis-
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be acti-
vated or deactivated.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Seite 57
General settings AT A GLANCE
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Control Display
Brightness
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired
brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the
brightness settings may not be clearly visi-
ble.
Screensaver
If no entries are made via the Central Infor-
mation Display (CID), a screensaver can be
displayed after an adjustable time.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Screensaver"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Messages
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages ar-
riving in the vehicle in list form.
General information
The following messages can be displayed:
– Traffic messages.
– Check Control messages.
– Communication messages, for example
e-mails, SMS text messages or remind-
ers.
– Service requirements messages.
Messages are additionally displayed in the
status field.
Retrieving messages
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened, where the
message is displayed.
Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control mes-
sages, can be deleted from the list. Check
Control messages are displayed as long as
they are relevant.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
3. Press button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Settings
The following settings can be adjusted:
Seite 58
AT A GLANCE General settings
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– Select the applications, from which mes-
sages will be permitted.
– Sort the messages according to date or
priority.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.
Data protection
Data transfer
Concept
The vehicle offers various functions which
require data to be transferred to MINI or a
service provider. The data transfer can be
deactivated for some functions.
General information
With data transfer deactivated, the respec-
tive function cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary.
Activating/deactivating the data
transfer
Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
play.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "My MINI"
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal data in the
vehicle
Concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
This personal data can be permanently de-
leted via the Central Information Display
(CID).
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
following data is deleted:
– Driver profile settings.
– Stored radio stations.
– Stored programmable memory buttons.
– Travel and Onboard Computer informa-
tion.
– Music collection.
– Navigation, for instance stored destina-
tions.
– Phone book.
– Office data, for instance voice notes.
– Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take
up to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the
Control Display.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "My MINI"
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Delete personal data"
Seite 59
General settings AT A GLANCE
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
6. "Delete personal data"
7. "OK"
8. Exit and lock the vehicle.
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is
completed.
If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the
deletion.
Canceling deletion
Start the engine to cancel deletion of the
data.
Connections
Concept
Various connection types are available for
using mobile devices in the vehicle. The
connection type to select depends on the
mobile device and the desired function.
General information
The following overview shows possible
functions and the suitable connection types
for them. The scope of functions depends on
the mobile device.
Function Connec-
tion type
Making calls via the hands-
free system.
Using phone functions via
the Central Information Dis-
play (CID).
Using the smartphone Of-
fice functions.
Bluetooth.
Playing music from the
smartphone or the audio
player.
Bluetooth
or USB.
Function Connec-
tion type
Using compatible apps via
the Central Information Dis-
play (CID).
Bluetooth
or USB.
USB storage device:
Exporting and importing
driver profiles.
Performing software up-
dates.
Playing music.
USB.
Playing videos from the
smartphone or the USB stor-
age device.
USB.
Using Apple CarPlay apps
via the Central Information
Display (CID) and voice op-
eration.
Bluetooth
and WiFi.
The following connection types require one-
time pairing with the vehicle:
– Bluetooth.
– Apple CarPlay
Paired devices are automatically recognized
later on and connected to the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information sys-
tems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is pos-
sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident. Only use the systems
or devices when the traffic situation al-
lows. As warranted, stop and use the sys-
tems and devices while the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Seite 60
AT A GLANCE General settings
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Compatible devices
General information
Information on mobile devices compatible
with the vehicle can be found at www.mini-
usa.com/bluetooth.
Malfunctions may occur with devices not
listed or deviating software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
When looking for compatible devices, you
may have to state the vehicle identification
number and the software part number.
These numbers can be displayed in the ve-
hicle.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
A software update, refer to page 66, can
be performed, if needed.
Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements
– Compatible device, refer to page 61,
with Bluetooth interface.
– The remote control is in the vehicle.
– The device is ready for operation.
– Bluetooth is activated on the device and
in the vehicle, refer to page 61.
– Bluetooth pre-settings, such as visibil-
ity, may be required on the device; refer
to the owner's manual of the device.
Switching on Bluetooth
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"
Activating/deactivating telephone
functions
To use all supported functions of a mobile
phone, the following functions must be acti-
vated prior to pairing.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select desired setting:
– "Office"
Activate function to transmit short
messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,
notes, and reminders to the vehicle.
Costs can be incurred by transmit-
ting all data to the vehicle.
– "Contact images"
Activate function to show the con-
tact pictures.
6. Move the Controller to the left.
Pairing the mobile device with the
vehicle
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
Seite 61
General settings AT A GLANCE
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
5. Select the functions for which the de-
vice will be used:
– "Telephone"
– "Bluetooth® audio"
– "Apps"
– "Apple CarPlay"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is
displayed on the Control Display.
6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vi-
cinity of the mobile device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-
pears on the mobile device display.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi-
cle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-
trol number is displayed or the control
number must be entered.
– Compare the control number dis-
played on the Control Display with
the control number on the display of
the device.
Confirm the control number on the
device and on the Control Display.
– Enter and confirm the same control
number on the device and via the
Central Information Display (CID).
The device is connected and displayed
in the device list.
If connection was not successful: Fre-
quently Asked Questions, refer to page 62.
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required
steps were completed in the specified order.
Despite that, the mobile device does not
function as expected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired
or connected?
– There are too many Bluetooth devices
connected to the mobile phone or vehi-
cle.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec-
tions with other devices.
Delete all known Bluetooth connections
from the device list on the mobile phone
and start a new device search.
– The mobile phone is in power-save mode
or has only a limited remaining battery
life.
Charge mobile phone.
Why does the mobile phone no longer re-
act?
– The applications on the mobile phone do
not function anymore.
Switch the mobile phone off and on
again.
– Possibly too high or too low ambient
temperatures for mobile phone opera-
tion.
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-
treme ambient temperatures.
Why can phone functions not be used via
the Central Information Display (CID)?
– The mobile phone may not be properly
configured, for instance as Bluetooth au-
dio device.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele-
phone or additional phone function.
Why are no or not all phone book entries
displayed or why are they incomplete?
– Transmission of the phone book entries
is not yet complete.
– It is possible that only the phone book
entries of the mobile phone or the SIM
card are transmitted.
– It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
– It may not be possible to transmit con-
tacts from social networks.
Seite 62
AT A GLANCE General settings
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
– Data volume of the contact too large, for
instance due to stored information such
as notes.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
– A mobile phone is only connected as an
audio source.
Reconfigure the mobile phone and con-
nect it with the telephone or additional
phone function.
How can the phone connection quality be
improved?
– The strength of the Bluetooth signal on
the mobile phone can be adjusted, de-
pending on the mobile phone.
– Insert mobile phone into the wireless
charging tray.
– Adjust the volume of the microphone
and loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked
and the required function is still not availa-
ble, contact the hotline, a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
USB connection
General information
Mobile devices with a USB port are con-
nected to the USB interface.
– Mobile phones.
– Audio devices with USB port, for in-
stance MP3 player.
– USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported.
FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended
formats.
The following applications are possible:
– Exporting and importing driver profiles,
refer to page 89.
– Playing music files via USB audio.
– Playing videos via USB video.
– Loading of software updates, refer to
page 66.
Follow the following when connecting:
– Do not use force when plugging the con-
nector into the USB interface.
– Use a flexible adapter cable.
– Protect the USB storage device against
mechanical damage.
– Due to the large number of USB media
available on the market, it cannot be
guaranteed that every device is operable
on the vehicle.
– Do not expose USB media to extreme en-
vironmental conditions, such as very
high temperatures; refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
– Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the me-
dia stored on the USB storage device
cannot be guaranteed in all cases.
– A connected USB storage device will be
supplied with charging current via the
USB interface if the device supports
this.
– To ensure proper transmission of the
stored data, do not charge a USB storage
device via the onboard socket, when it
is connected to the USB interface.
– Depending on how the USB storage de-
vice is being used, settings may be re-
quired on the USB storage device, refer
to the owner's manual of the device.
Not compatible USB media:
– USB hard drives.
– USB hubs.
– USB memory card readers with multiple
inserts.
– HFS-formatted USB media.
– Devices such as fans or lamps.
Seite 63
General settings AT A GLANCE
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Functional requirement
Compatible device, refer to page 61, with
USB interface.
Connecting the device
Connect the USB storage device using a
suitable adapter cable to a USB interface,
refer to page 226.
The USB storage device is connected to the
vehicle and displayed in the device list.
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a com-
patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri
voice operation and the Central Information
Display (CID).
Functional requirements
– Compatible iPhone, refer to page 61.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
– Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
– Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice opera-
tion are switched on on the iPhone.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
– "Bluetooth®"
– "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay
Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to
page 61, via Bluetooth
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list, refer to
page 65.
Operation
For more information, refer to the
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle or
the printed Owner's Manual for navigation,
entertainment, communication.
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required
steps were completed in the specified order.
Despite that, the mobile device does not
function as expected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
The iPhone has already been paired with
Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is
established, CarPlay can no longer be se-
lected.
– Delete the iPhone concerned from the
device list.
– On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con-
cerned from the list of stored vehicles
under Bluetooth and under WiFi.
– Pair the iPhone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and
the required function is still not available:
contact the hotline, a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Managing mobile devices
General information
– After one-time pairing, the devices are
automatically recognized and recon-
nected when the ignition is switched on.
Seite 64
AT A GLANCE General settings
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– The data stored on the SIM card or in
the mobile phone are transferred to the
vehicle after recognition.
– For some devices, certain settings may
be necessary, for instance authorization,
see owner's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list
All devices paired and/or connected with
the vehicle are displayed in the device list.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
A symbol indicates, for which function a de-
vice is used.
Symbol Function
"Telephone"
"Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth® audio"
"Apps"
"Apple CarPlay"
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated
for paired and connected devices.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the
function will be deactivated where appro-
priate for a device that is already connected
and the device will be disconnected.
Disconnecting the device
The connection of the device to the vehicle
is disconnected.
The device remains paired and can be con-
nected again, refer to page 65.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"
Connecting the device
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"
The functions that were assigned to the de-
vice before disconnecting are assigned to
the device when it is reconnected. If the de-
vice is already connected, these functions
are deactivated.
Deleting the device
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"
The device is disconnected and removed
from the device list.
Seite 65
General settings AT A GLANCE
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Swapping the telephone and additional
phone
If two mobile phones are connected to the
vehicle, the functions of the phone and ad-
ditional phone can be switched.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
Software update
General information
The vehicle supports a large number of mo-
bile devices, for instance mobile phones and
MP3 players. Software updates are available
for many of the supported devices. The ve-
hicle is maintained up-to-date via regular
vehicle software updates.
Updates and related current information is
available on the Internet at www.mini.com/
update.
Displaying the installed software
version
The software version installed in the vehicle
is displayed.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Show current version"
If an update has been carried out before, se-
lect the desired version to display additional
information.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. Store the file for the software update in
the main directory of a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB data storage to a USB
interface.
3. "My MINI"
4. "System settings"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10. Wait for the update to complete.
11. Confirm system restart.
Restoring the software version
The software version before the last soft-
ware update and the version before the first
software update can be restored.
The software may only be restored when
the vehicle is stationary.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5.
– "Previous version"
The previous software version is re-
stored.
– "Default software settings"
The first software version is re-
stored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
Seite 66
AT A GLANCE General settings
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.
Seite 67
General settings AT A GLANCE
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Owner's Manual media
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
General information
You can use the following media formats to
call up the content in the Owner's Manual:
– Printed Owner's Manual, refer to
page 68.
– Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-
cle, refer to page 68.
Printed Owner's Manual
Concept
The printed Owner's Manual describes all
standard, country-specific, and optional fea-
tures offered with the series.
General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-
tainment, and Communication can be ob-
tained as printed book from the service cen-
ter.
Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the instructions of the Supple-
mentary Owner's Manuals, which are in-
cluded in addition to the onboard literature.
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in
the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual
can be displayed on the Control Display.
Selecting the Owner's Manual
1. Press button.
2. "My MINI"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the required method of accessing
the contents.
Scrolling through the owner's
manual
Turn the Controller, until the next or previ-
ous contents are displayed.
Context help
General information
The section of the Owner's Manual relating
to the function that is currently selected
can be displayed directly.
Seite 68
AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Opening via Central Information
Display (CID)
Change directly to the Options menu from
the function on the Control Display:
1. Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, for instance
radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control
Display and to alternate between the two
displays:
1. Press the button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to
last displayed function.
5. Press the button to return to the
page of the Owner's Manual displayed
last.
To alternate continuously between the last
displayed function and the last displayed
page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4
& 5. Opens a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the
programmable memory buttons and called
up directly.
Storing
1. Select the desired entry point via the
Central Information Display (CID):
– "Quick reference"
– "Search by pictures"
– "Keyword search"
– "Animations"
2. Press and hold the desired but-
ton, until a signal sounds.
Executing
Press button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed
immediately.
Seite 69
Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
MINI eDRIVE
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Hybrid system
Concept
This MINI is a hybrid vehicle. In addition to
the combustion engine, the vehicle features
a high-voltage system that consists of an
electric motor and a high-voltage battery
among other things.
The hybrid system can move the vehicle
purely electrically. It can also support the
combustion engine in certain situations.
General information
The vehicle does not consume any fuel
while driving purely electrically. This ena-
bles environmentally friendly driving with-
out emissions in inner-city traffic. If the
combustion engine is used, the hybrid sys-
tem support reduces fuel consumption even
further.
In addition to this, the electric motor acts as
an alternator: during braking and coasting,
the electric motor converts the vehicle's ki-
netic energy into electrical energy. The
electrical energy is stored in the high-volt-
age battery and is used to drive the electric
motor.
The vehicle can be charged, refer to
page 252, via the charging socket at charg-
ing stations or household sockets.
Overview
1 Combustion engine
2 Control-system electronics, electric mo-
tor
3 Electric motor
4 High-voltage cables: orange
5 High-voltage battery
6 Charging socket
7 Vehicle battery
Functions while driving
Electric driving: ePOWER.
Under certain conditions, refer to page 120,
the vehicle is powered only by the electric
motor.
Variable drive type
The combustion engine drives the front axle
and the electric motor the rear axle. De-
pending on the operating condition, the ve-
hicle has the options of front-wheel drive,
rear-wheel drive or bundled for four-wheel
drive.
Seite 70
AT A GLANCE MINI eDRIVE
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Follow the information about electric driv-
ing ePOWER, driving with the combustion
engine POWER, and the driving stability
control systems.
Assistance from the electric motor
Driving off and accelerating require a lot of
energy.
To optimize acceleration and to reduce fuel
consumption, the electric motor boosts the
combustion engine, refer to page 123. To
do this, the electric motor uses the energy
saved in the high-voltage battery.
Driving with the combustion engine:
POWER
The combustion engine, refer to page 122,
provides the main drive power to move the
vehicle. If necessary, the high-voltage bat-
tery is charged at the same time.
The hybrid system always starts the com-
bustion engine automatically.
Auto Start/Stop function, coasting
The Auto Start/Stop function, refer to
page 119, switches the combustion engine
off while the vehicle is moving, when brak-
ing, when rolling to a halt, and while the ve-
hicle is stopped. The condition of rolling
with the combustion engine switched off is
referred to as coasting. Convenience func-
tions such as the automatic climate control
are supplied by the high-voltage battery and
can remain switched on.
Energy recovery: CHARGE
The high-voltage battery of the hybrid sys-
tem is charged through energy recovery
while driving.
The electric motor acts as a generator and
converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle
into electrical energy, refer to page 123.
Charging the vehicle
The high-voltage battery of the vehicle can
be charged, refer to page 252, via the
charging socket at charging stations or
household sockets.
Regular and complete charging of the high-
voltage battery reduces the fuel consump-
tion by using electric energy.
Climate control while parking and
charging
The hybrid system makes it possible to op-
erate the automatic climate control prior to
driving off and with the combustion engine
switched off.
During vehicle charging or if the high-volt-
age battery is sufficiently charged, the car's
interior can be can be cooled or heated in
advance of the trip, refer to page 259.
The stationary climate control can also be
switched on directly.
Display
The displays of the hybrid system, refer to
page 139, provide information about the
current state of hybrid operation.
Energy-saving driving
To save energy while driving, read the fol-
lowing descriptions:
– Saving fuel, refer to page 245.
– Using the hybrid system efficiently, re-
fer to page 246.
– GREEN Mode.
– Adapting to the course of the road.
Safety of the hybrid system
Follow the information on safety, refer to
page 73.
Seite 71
MINI eDRIVE AT A GLANCE
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Safety of the hybrid system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Working on the hybrid system
General information
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that no changes be made to the vehi-
cle, for instance the retrofitting of accesso-
ries, that will have an effect on the vehicle’s
hybrid system.
Safety information
DANGER
Improperly executed work, in particular
maintenance and repair on the high-volt-
age system, can lead to electric shock.
There is a risk of injury, fire and danger to
life.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that the work on the vehicle, in par-
ticular maintenance and repair, be per-
formed by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Contact with water
The hybrid system is typically safe even in
the following example situations:
– Water in the footwell, for instance after
a rainstorm when sunroof was kept
open.
– Vehicle is in water but only up to the al-
lowed height.
– Fluid escapes in the cargo area.
Automatic deactivation
If an accident occurs, the hybrid system is
switched off automatically to prevent risk of
danger to occupants and other road users.
Read the information on What to do after
an accident, refer to page 311.
Seite 73
Safety of the hybrid system AT A GLANCE
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
CONTROLS
Opening and closing ................................................................................ 76
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ..................................................... 99
Transporting children safely .............................................................. 111
Driving ...................................................................................................... 116
Displays .................................................................................................... 138
Lights ........................................................................................................ 161
Safety ......................................................................................................... 167
Driving stability control systems ..................................................... 187
Driving comfort ...................................................................................... 191
Climate control ....................................................................................... 211
Interior equipment ................................................................................ 220
Storage compartments ......................................................................... 227
Cargo area ................................................................................................ 230
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Remote control
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote
controls with integrated key.
Each remote control contains a replaceable
battery. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 79.
You may set the button functions, depend-
ing on the vehicle equipment and country
version. Settings, refer to page 91.
The vehicle stores personal settings for ev-
ery remote control. Driver profile, refer to
page 89.
The remote controls hold information about
required maintenance. Service data in the
remote control, refer to page 292.
To prevent possible locking in of the remote
control, take the remote control with you
when exiting the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock them-
selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot
be opened from the outside. There is a risk
of injury. Take the remote control with
you so that the vehicle can be opened from
the outside.
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the
vehicle while being exposed to extreme
temperatures are at risk of injury or death.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there are people in it.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause
the vehicle to move and endanger them-
selves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
– Releasing the parking brake.
– Opening and closing the doors or
windows.
– Engaging selector lever position N.
– Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
not leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle. Take the remote control
with you when exiting and lock the vehi-
cle.
Seite 76
CONTROLS Opening and closing
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
With automatic tailgate operation: open
the tailgate
4 Panic mode
Unlocking
Press the button on the remote con-
trol.
Depending on the settings, refer to
page 91, the following access points are
unlocked.
– Driver's door.
Press the button on the remote control
again to unlock the other vehicle access
points.
– All doors and tailgate.
In addition, the following functions are exe-
cuted:
– Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig-
nals and the horn. This function must be
activated in the settings, refer to
page 91.
– The settings stored in the driver profile,
refer to page 89, are applied.
– The driver's seat is set to the last posi-
tion saved in the driver's profile. This
function must be activated in the set-
tings, refer to page 91.
– The interior lights, refer to page 165,
and the MINI logo projection are
switched on, provided that the interior
lights were not switched off manually.
– Depending on the settings, the welcome
light and headlight courtesy delay fea-
ture, refer to page 162, are switched on.
– Exterior mirrors folded through conven-
ient closing are folded open.
– The alarm system, refer to page 93, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the
remote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.
Locking
1. Close the driver's door.
2. Press button on the remote con-
trol.
The following functions are executed:
– All doors and the tailgate are locked.
– Locking is confirmed by the turn signals
and the horn. This function must be ac-
tivated in the settings, refer to
page 91.
– The alarm system, refer to page 93, is
switched on.
If the drive-ready state is still switched on
when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
honks twice. In this case, the drive-ready
state must be switched off by means of the
Start/Stop button.
Seite 77
Opening and closing CONTROLS
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
With Comfort Access: convenient
closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the
doors is clear during convenient closing.
Closing
Press and hold this button on the
remote control in the area close to
the vehicle.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
closed, as long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
Switch on interior lights and
courtesy light
Press button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
The MINI logo projection is also switched
on.
These functions are not available if the inte-
rior lights were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
After locking, wait 10 seconds before press-
ing the button again.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, it is possible to specify
whether the tailgate can be operated with
the remote control and how the vehicle
doors will respond to this. Adjust the set-
tings, refer to page 91.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tail-
gate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the area of movement
of the tailgate is clear during opening and
closing.
NOTICE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driv-
ing. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed
objects do not hit the windows.
Opening
Press and hold the button on the re-
mote control for approx. 1 second.
Without automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung
upward.
With automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate opens automatically.
Seite 78
CONTROLS Opening and closing
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
– Press button on the remote con-
trol and hold for at least 3 sec-
onds.
– Briefly press the button on the remote
control three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Replacing the battery
1. Remove the integrated key from the re-
mote control, refer to page 81.
2. Slide the integrated key into the open-
ing and raise the cover.
The battery compartment is accessible.
3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of
the battery compartment and raise the
cover.
4. Push battery in the direction of the ar-
row using a pointed object and lift it
out.
5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the
positive side facing up.
6. Insert lid and cover.
7. Push the integrated key into the remote
control until it engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair
shop or take them to a collection point.
Additional remote controls
Additional remote controls are available
from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked and re-
placed by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle
may malfunction under the following cir-
cumstances:
Seite 79
Opening and closing CONTROLS
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– The battery of the remote control is dis-
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 79.
– Interference of the radio connection
from transmission towers or other
equipment with high transmitting
power.
– Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to-
gether with metal objects.
– Interference of the radio connection
from mobile phones or other electronic
devices in direct proximity to the re-
mote control.
Do not transport the remote control to-
gether with electronic devices.
– Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of mobile devices, for
instance charging of a mobile phone.
– The remote control is in direct proximity
of the wireless charging tray.
Place the remote control down at a dif-
ferent location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can
be unlocked and locked from the outside
with the integrated key, refer to page 80.
Switching on the drive-ready state via
emergency detection of the remote
control
It is not possible to start the engine if the
remote control has not been detected.
It is not possible to switch on the drive-
ready state if the remote control has not
been detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1. Hold the remote control as shown
against the marked area on the steering
column. Pay attention to the display in
the instrument cluster.
2. If the remote control is detected:
Switch on drive-ready state within
10 seconds.
If the remote control is not detected,
slightly change the position of the remote
control and repeat the procedure.
Frequently asked questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to
open a vehicle with an accidentally locked
in remote control?
– The options provided by the Remote
Services of the MINI Connected app in-
clude the ability to lock and unlock a ve-
hicle.
This requires an active MINI Connected
contract and the MINI Connected app
must be installed on a smartphone.
– Unlocking the vehicle can be requested
via the MINI Connected Call Center.
An active MINI Connected contract is
required.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and un-
locked without remote control using the
integrated key.
Seite 80
CONTROLS Opening and closing
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Safety information
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the
vehicle while being exposed to extreme
temperatures are at risk of injury or death.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there are people in it.
NOTICE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or the
integrated key can be damaged. There is a
risk of damage to property. Remove the
integrated key before pulling the outside
door handle.
Removing
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Locking/unlocking via the door
lock
1. Remove lid on the door lock.
To do this, slide the integrated key into
the opening from below and remove the
lid.
2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the
vehicle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the
door is opened, if the vehicle has been un-
locked via the door lock. In order to stop
this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote
control or switch on the ignition, if needed,
through emergency detection of the remote
control, refer to page 79.
Buttons for the central locking
system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehi-
cle is automatically unlocked. The hazard
warning system and interior lights come on.
Seite 81
Opening and closing CONTROLS
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Press the button with the front
doors closed.
The vehicle is not secured against theft
when locking.
Unlocking
Press button.
Opening
– Press button to unlock the doors
together, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
– Front doors: pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The other doors
remain locked.
– Back doors: pull twice on the door han-
dle on the door to be opened; the first
time unlocks the door, the second time
opens it. The other doors remain locked.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without acti-
vating the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote
control with you, such as in your pants
pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the re-
mote control when it is in close proximity
or in the car's interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following
functions:
– Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
– Convenient closing.
– Open the tailgate.
– Opening/closing the tailgate with no-
touch activation.
This function must be activated in the
settings, refer to page 91.
Functional requirements
– To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle
near the doors.
– The next unlocking and locking cycle is
not possible until after approx. 2 sec-
onds.
Unlocking
On the driver's or front passenger's outer
door handle, press the button.
Depending on the settings, refer to
page 91, only the driver's door may be un-
locked. Unlike when unlocking with the re-
Seite 82
CONTROLS Opening and closing
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
mote control, pressing the button on the
outer door handle again does not unlock the
other vehicle access points. Rather, the ve-
hicle is locked again.
If a door of a locked vehicle was opened
from the inside via the door opener, press-
ing the button on the outer door handle first
locks the vehicle again. To unlock, the but-
ton on the outer door handle must be
pressed again.
This is the case whether the vehicle was
locked automatically after driving off or via
the central locking system button from the
inside.
Locking
On the driver's or front passenger's outer
door handle, press the button.
Convenient closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the
doors is clear during convenient closing.
Closing
Press and hold down the button on the driv-
er's or front passenger's outer door handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and
glass sunroof will be closed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
Opening the tailgate
General information
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
locked doors are not unlocked.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tail-
gate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the area of movement
of the tailgate is clear during opening and
closing.
Seite 83
Opening and closing CONTROLS
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
NOTICE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driv-
ing. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed
objects do not hit the windows.
Opening
Press button next on tailgate.
Without automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung
upward.
With automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate opens automatically.
Opening and closing the split doors
with no-touch activation
Concept
The tailgate can be opened and closed with
no-touch activation using the remote con-
trol you are carrying. Two sensors detect a
forward-directed foot motion in the central
rear area and the tailgate is opened or
closed.
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
If the remote control is in the sensor area,
the tailgate can be opened or closed inad-
vertently by an unconscious or alleged rec-
ognized foot movement.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the
vehicle.
If the tailgate is opened with no-touch acti-
vation, locked doors are not unlocked.
Contactless opening and closing of the tail-
gate must be activated in the settings.
Safety information
WARNING
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts
may be touched, such as the hot exhaust
gas system. There is a risk of injury. When
moving your foot, make sure you have a
firm stance and do not touch the vehicle.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tail-
gate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the area of movement
of the tailgate is clear during opening and
closing.
Settings
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Tailgate"
5. Select desired setting:
Seite 84
CONTROLS Opening and closing
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– "Open by foot movement"
Contactless opening of the tailgate is
switched on or off.
– "Close by foot movement"
Contactless closing of the tailgate is
switched on or off.
Performing the foot movement
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle
at approx. one arm's length away from
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di-
rection of travel and immediately pull it
back. With this movement, the leg must
pass through the ranges of both sensors.
Opening
Perform the foot movement described ear-
lier.
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys-
tem flashes.
When the touchless closing is switched on:
moving your foot again will stop the open-
ing motion, and moving it one more time af-
ter that will close the tailgate.
Closing
Perform the foot movement described ear-
lier.
Before closing, the hazard warning system
flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.
When the touchless opening is switched on:
moving your foot again will stop the closing
motion, and moving it one more time after
that will open the tailgate.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle
may malfunction under the following cir-
cumstances:
– The battery of the remote control is dis-
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 79.
– Interference of the radio connection
from transmission towers or other
equipment with high transmitting
power.
– Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to-
gether with metal objects.
– Interference of the radio connection
from mobile phones or other electronic
devices in direct proximity to the re-
mote control.
Do not transport the remote control to-
gether with electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the
locking request recognition function on the
door handles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and
lock the vehicle using the buttons of the re-
mote control or using the integrated key, re-
fer to page 80.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, it is possible to specify
whether the tailgate can be operated with
the remote control and how the vehicle
Seite 85
Opening and closing CONTROLS
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
doors will respond to this. Adjust the set-
tings, refer to page 91.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tail-
gate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the area of movement
of the tailgate is clear during opening and
closing.
NOTICE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driv-
ing. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed
objects do not hit the windows.
Without automatic tailgate
operation
Opening from the outside
– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi-
cle or have the remote control with you.
Press button next on tailgate.
– Press and hold button on the re-
mote control for approx. 1 sec-
ond.
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked. Unlocking with the re-
mote control, refer to page 78.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung
upward.
Opening from the inside
With Steptronic transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, pull the
button in the storage compartment of the
driver's door upwards.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-
tion P must be engaged first.
With manual transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, pull the
button in the storage compartment of the
driver's door upwards twice in quick suc-
cession.
Closing
Recessed grips on the interior trim of the
tailgate can be used to conveniently pull
down the tailgate.
Seite 86
CONTROLS Opening and closing
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
With automatic tailgate operation
Opening
Adjusting the opening height
You can set how far the tailgate should
open.
When adjusting the opening height, ensure
that there is a clearance of at least
4 in/10 cm above the tailgate.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Tailgate"
5. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired
opening height.
From the outside
– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi-
cle or have the remote control with you.
Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
– Press and hold button on the re-
mote control for approx. 1 sec-
ond.
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked. Unlocking with the re-
mote control, refer to page 78.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate
opens automatically to the adjusted opening
height.
From the inside
With Steptronic transmission:
Pull button in the storage compart-
ment of the driver's door upward.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-
tion P must be engaged first.
With manual transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, pull the
button in the storage compartment of the
driver's door upwards twice in quick suc-
cession.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate
opens automatically to the adjusted opening
height.
Interruption of the opening procedure
The opening procedure is interrupted in the
following situations:
– When the vehicle starts moving.
– By pressing the button on the outside of
the tailgate. Pressing again closes the
tailgate.
– By pressing the button on the inside of
the tailgate. Pressing again closes the
tailgate.
– By pressing the button on the remote
control. Pressing again continues the
opening motion.
– By pressing or pulling the button in the
storage compartment of the driver's
door. Pulling again continues the open-
ing motion.
Closing
From the outside
Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
Seite 87
Opening and closing CONTROLS
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
From the inside
Press and hold the button in the stor-
age compartment of the driver's door.
The remote control must be located in the
car's interior for this function.
An acoustic signal sounds before the tail-
gate is closed.
From inside the tailgate
Without Comfort Access:
Press button on the inside of the tailgate.
With Comfort Access:
– Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of
the tailgate.
– Press button, arrow 2.
The vehicle will be locked after closing
the tailgate. The driver's door must be
closed for this purpose and the remote
control must be outside of the vehicle in
the area of the tailgate.
Interruption of the closing procedure
The closing procedure is interrupted in the
following situations:
– If the vehicle starts off with a jerky
movement.
– By pressing the button on the outside of
the tailgate. Pressing again closes the
tailgate.
– By pressing the button on the inside of
the tailgate. Pressing again closes the
tailgate.
– By releasing the button in the storage
compartment of the driver's door. Press-
ing again and holding continues the
closing motion.
Malfunction
Safety information
WARNING
With manual operation of a blocked tail-
gate, it can release itself unexpectedly
from the blockage. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Do not oper-
ate the tailgate manually if it is blocked.
Have it checked by a dealer’s service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Manual operation
Operate the unlocked tailgate manually with
a slow and smooth motion.
To close the tailgate fully, press down
lightly only. Closing occurs automatically.
Seite 88
CONTROLS Opening and closing
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Driver profile
Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for
several drivers can be stored and called up
again when required.
General information
There are three driver profiles with which
personal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev-
ery remote control has one of these driver
profiles assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote
control, the assigned personal driver profile
will be activated. All settings stored in the
driver profile are automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote con-
trol, the vehicle will adjust the personal set-
tings during unlocking. These settings are
also restored, if the vehicle has been used in
the meantime by a person with a different
remote control.
Changes to the settings are automatically
stored in the driver profile currently acti-
vated.
If another driver profile is selected via the
Central Information Display (CID), the set-
tings stored in it will be applied automati-
cally. The new driver profile is assigned to
the remote control currently used.
There is an additional guest profile available
that is not assigned to any remote control: it
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal driver pro-
files.
Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the
driver profile associated to a particular
driver, the detected remote control must be
clearly allocated to the driver.
This is the case when:
– The driver is only carrying his or her
own remote control.
– The driver unlocks the vehicle.
– The driver gets into the vehicle through
the driver's door.
Settings
The settings for the following systems and
functions are stored in the active profile.
The scope of storable settings depends on
country and equipment.
– Unlocking and locking.
– Lights.
– Radio.
– Instrument cluster.
– Programmable memory buttons.
– Volumes, tone.
– Control Display.
– Climate control.
– Navigation.
– PDC Park Distance Control.
– Rearview camera.
– Head-up Display.
– MINI Driving Modes.
– Intelligent Safety.
– Driver's seat position, exterior mirror
position.
Both the positions saved via the seat
memory and the last position set are
saved.
Profile management
Selecting a driver profile
Regardless of the remote control in use, a
different driver profile may be activated.
This allows you to call up personal vehicle
settings, even if you did not unlock the ve-
hicle with your own remote control.
Seite 89
Opening and closing CONTROLS
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
– All settings stored in the called-up
driver profile are automatically applied.
– The called-up driver profile is assigned
to the remote control being used at the
time.
– If the driver profile is already assigned
to a different remote control, this driver
profile will apply to both remote con-
trols.
Using a guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings
that are stored in none of the three personal
driver profiles.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is
not assigned to the current remote control.
Renaming a driver profile
A personal name can be assigned to the ac-
tive driver profile to avoid confusion be-
tween the driver profiles.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this
symbol can be renamed.
4. "Change driver profile name"
5. Enter profile name.
6. Select the symbol.
Resetting a driver profile
The settings of the driver profile currently
in use are reset to their factory settings.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this
symbol can be reset.
4. "Reset driver profile"
5. "OK"
Exporting driver profiles
Most settings of the active driver profile
can be exported.
Exporting is helpful when storing and re-
trieving personal settings, for instance be-
fore delivering the vehicle to a workshop.
The stored driver profiles can be taken into
another vehicle.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this
symbol can be exported.
4. "Export driver profile (USB)"
Select USB storage device as needed.
Importing driver profiles
Profiles stored on a USB storage device can
be imported via the USB interface.
The existing settings of the active driver
profile are overwritten with the settings of
the imported driver profile.
Seite 90
CONTROLS Opening and closing
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.
The driver profile marked with this
symbol can be overwritten.
4. "Import driver profile (USB)"
Select USB storage device as needed.
5. Select the driver profile to be imported.
Displaying driver profiles during start
The driver profiles can be displayed during
each start to select the desired profile.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
System limits
A clear assignment between the remote
control and driver may not be possible in
the following cases, for example.
– The passenger unlocks the vehicle with
his or her own remote control, but an-
other person is driving.
– The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com-
fort Access and has multiple remote
controls with him or her.
– The driver changes, but the vehicle is
not locked and unlocked.
– Multiple remote controls are located
outside of the vehicle.
Settings
General information
Depending on the package and country ver-
sion, various settings are available for the
remote control functions.
These settings are stored for the driver pro-
file, refer to page 89, currently used.
Unlocking
Doors
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select desired setting:
– "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door is unlocked.
Pressing again unlocks the entire ve-
hicle.
– "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4.
The text next to the symbol indicates
the current setting.
5. Select desired setting:
– "Tailgate"
Depending on your vehicle's optional
features, the tailgate is either un-
locked or opened.
Seite 91
Opening and closing CONTROLS
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– "Tailgate and door(s)"
Depending on your vehicle's optional
features, the tailgate is either un-
locked or opened and the doors un-
locked.
– "Tailgate opens after unlocking"
The vehicle must be unlocked before
the tailgate can be used with the re-
mote control.
– "Button lock"
It is not possible to use the tailgate
via the remote control.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, this setting may not be of-
fered.
Adjusting the last seat and mirror
position
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The setting can be made for the
driver profile marked with this symbol.
4. "Last seat position automatic"
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's
seat and exterior mirrors resume their last
set positions.
The most recent position is independent of
the positions saved via the seat memory.
Automatic locking
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select desired setting:
– "Lock automatically"
The vehicle locks automatically after
a short period of time if no door is
opened after unlocking.
– "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Automatic unlocking
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"
After the engine is switched off by
pressing the Start/Stop button, the
locked vehicle is automatically un-
locked.
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired con-
firmation signals.
– "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
– With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
Seite 92
CONTROLS Opening and closing
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle
alarm system reacts to the following
changes:
– Unauthorized opening of a door, the
hood or the tailgate.
– Movements in the car's interior.
– Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during
attempts at stealing a wheel or when
towing the vehicle.
– Disconnected battery voltage.
– Improper use of the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis.
– Locking the vehicle while a device is
connected to the socket for the OBD On-
board-Diagnosis. Socket for the OBD On-
board Diagnosis, refer to page 293.
The alarm system signals these changes vis-
ually and acoustically:
– Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the
acoustic alarm may be suppressed.
– Visual alarm:
By flashing the exterior lighting.
Overview
Indicator light in the roof fin.
Indicator light on the interior mirror.
Switching on/off
When you unlock and lock the vehicle, ei-
ther with the remote control or with Com-
fort Access, the alarm system is switched
off and on at the same time.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door
is opened if the door was unlocked using
the integrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 94.
Opening the tailgate with the alarm
system switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again provided the doors are
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
– Press button on the remote con-
trol and hold for at least 3 sec-
onds.
– Briefly press the button on the remote
control three times in succession.
Seite 93
Opening and closing CONTROLS
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Signals of the indicator lights
– The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
– Indicator light flashes for approx.
10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or
tailgate are not correctly closed. Cor-
rectly closed access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt
alarm sensor will be switched on.
– The indicator light goes out after un-
locking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
– The indicator light flashes after unlock-
ing until the engine ignition is switched
on, but no longer than approx. 5 mi-
nutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations
such as attempts to steal a wheel or when
the vehicle is towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion
sensor can trigger an alarm, although no un-
authorized action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
– In automatic vehicle washes.
– In duplex garages.
– During transport on trains carrying ve-
hicles, at sea or on a trailer.
– With animals in the vehicle.
– When the vehicle is locked after start of
fueling.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo-
tion sensor can be switched off in such sit-
uations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button
again within 10 seconds as soon as
the vehicle is locked.
The indicator light lights up for approx.
2 seconds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion
sensor are switched off until the vehicle is
locked again.
Switching off the alarm
– Unlock the vehicle with the remote con-
trol or switch on the ignition, if needed
through emergency detection of remote
control, refer to page 79.
– With Comfort Access: If you have the
remote control with you, unlock the ve-
hicle using the button on the driver's
side or passenger side door.
Power windows
General information
If an accident of a certain severity occurs,
the windows are automatically closed ex-
cept a gap.
Seite 94
CONTROLS Opening and closing
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Safety information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of
the windows is clear during opening and
closing.
Overview
Power windows.
Safety switch.
Opening
– Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is
being held.
– Press the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Press-
ing the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control,
refer to page 77.
Closing
– Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
being held.
– Pull the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
The window closes automatically if the
door is closed. Pulling the switch again
stops the motion.
Convenient closing via the remote control,
refer to page 78.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to
page 83.
Jam protection system
General information
If the closing force exceeds a specific value
as one of the front windows closes, the clos-
ing action is interrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Safety information
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an-
tennas can impact jam protection. There is
a risk of injury. Do not install accessories
in the area of movement of the windows.
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as
follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
Seite 95
Opening and closing CONTROLS
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
The window closes with limited jam pro-
tection. If the closing force exceeds a
specific threshold, closing is inter-
rupted.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds
and hold it there.
The window closes without jam protec-
tion.
Safety switch
General information
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, for instance from
opening and closing the rear windows using
the switches in the rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs,
the safety function is switched off automati-
cally.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety func-
tion is switched on.
Malfunction
General information
In certain situations a window can only be
operated to a limited extent.
– After a power failure during the opening
or closing process, the a window can
only be operated to a limited extent. The
system must be initialized in this case.
– The power window motors are equipped
with overheating protection. If a win-
dow is opened and closed several times
within a short period of time, the over-
heating protection switches the motor
off temporarily. Depending on the de-
gree of overheating, it may only be pos-
sible to close the window or it may not
be possible to operate it at all.
In this case: allow the power window
motor to cool down.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the ve-
hicle is stationary and the engine is run-
ning.
During initialization, the affected window
closes without jam protection.
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of
the windows is clear during opening and
closing.
1. Open the affected window completely.
2. Pull the switch to the resistance
point and hold.
The window closes.
3. Continue holding the switch pulled
to the resistance point.
The window opens and closes once or
twice after approx. 15 seconds, depend-
ing on the vehicle's equipment.
4. Release switch.
Panoramic glass sunroof
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the glass
sunroof is automatically closed.
Seite 96
CONTROLS Opening and closing
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of
the glass sunroof is clear during opening
and closing.
Overview
Tilting the glass sunroof
Press back the switch up to or
beyond the resistance point
and release it.
The glass sunroof is raised.
Opening glass sunroof
When the glass sunroof is closed
Press the switch back beyond
the resistance point and re-
lease it twice.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again
stops the motion.
With the glass sunroof completely
raised
– Slide switch back to the re-
sistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is
opened as long as the
switch is pressed.
– Press the switch back beyond the resist-
ance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
tion.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's
interior are lowest when the glass sunroof
is not fully open. In these models, the auto-
matic function initially only opens the glass
sunroof up to this comfort position.
Pressing the switch again opens the glass
sunroof fully.
Closing glass sunroof
With the glass sunroof open
– Slide switch forward to the
resistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is closed
as long as the switch is
pressed and stops in the
raised position.
– Press the switch forward beyond the re-
sistance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is closed and stops in
the raised position.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
tion.
– Press the switch forward beyond the re-
sistance point and release it twice.
The glass sunroof is closed.
Seite 97
Opening and closing CONTROLS
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
tion.
With the glass sunroof completely
raised
Press the switch forward be-
yond the resistance point and
release it.
The glass sunroof is closed.
Jam protection system
General information
If the closing force exceeds a specific value
as a glass sunroof closes, the closing action
is interrupted.
The glass sunroof opens slightly.
Closing without the jam protection
system
If there is an external danger, proceed as
follows:
1. Push the switch forward past the resist-
ance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes with limited
jam protection. If the closing force ex-
ceeds a specific threshold, closing is in-
terrupted.
2. Push the switch forward again past the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing after a power
interruption
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only
be operated to a limited extent. The system
must be initialized in this case. MINI rec-
ommends having this work performed only
by a dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Seite 98
CONTROLS Opening and closing
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the
needs of the occupants can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seat-
ing position plays an important role. Follow
the information in the following chapters:
– Seats, refer to page 99.
– Safety belts, refer to page 103.
– Head restraints, refer to page 105.
– Airbags, refer to page 167.
Front seats
Safety information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead to
unexpected movements of the seat. Vehi-
cle control could be lost. There is a risk of
an accident. Only adjust the seat on the
driver's side when the vehicle is station-
ary.
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no
longer be ensured. There is a risk of slid-
ing under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip.
Adjust the backrest so that it is in the
most upright position as possible and do
not adjust again while driving.
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the seat is clear prior
to any adjustment.
Manually adjustable seats
Overview
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt
Seite 99
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de-
sired direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat for-
ward or back slightly making sure it en-
gages properly.
Height
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as
needed to reach the desired height.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be
adjusted in a way that it supports the lum-
bar region of the spine. The lower back and
the spine are supported for upright posture.
Turn the wheel in order to increase or de-
crease the curvature.
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is
stored for the profile currently used. When
the vehicle is unlocked via the remote con-
trol, the position is automatically retrieved
if the function, refer to page 92, is activated
for this purpose.
The current seat position can be stored us-
ing the memory function, refer to page 107.
Overview
1 Memory function
2 Lumbar support
Seite 100
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
3 Backrest tilt
4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Lumbar support
Concept
The curvature of the seat backrest can be
adjusted in a way that it supports the lum-
bar region of the spine. The lower back and
the spine are supported for upright posture.
Settings
– Press the front/rear sec-
tion of the button:
The curvature is in-
creased/decreased.
– Press the upper/lower sec-
tion of the button:
The curvature is shifted
up/down.
Seite 101
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad-
just the thigh support.
Front seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera-
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx.
15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is acti-
vated automatically with the temperature
selected last.
When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to
page 247, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Rear seats
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when folding
down the center armrest in the rear. There
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area
of movement of the center armrest is clear
during folding down.
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the rear seat
backrest while driving may occur due to
unintentional unlocking of the rear seat
backrests by the straps. There is a risk of
injury. Do not fasten any objects to the
straps for unlocking the rear backrests.
Backrest tilt
Pull the strap and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
After the adjustment, move the backrest
slightly forward or back to engage it cor-
rectly.
Seite 102
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and safety
belt buckles
The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to
ensure occupant safety. However, they can
only offer protection when adjusted cor-
rectly.
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear
seat are intended for the persons sitting on
the left and right.
The center safety belt buckle of the rear
seat is intended for the person sitting in the
middle.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are be-
ing worn by all occupants before driving off.
Although airbags enhance safety by provid-
ing added protection, they are not a substi-
tute for safety belts.
If needed, disengage the safety belt in the
rear from the belt buckle on the side.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of
every build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than
one person will potentially defeat the abil-
ity of the safety belt to serve its protective
function. There is a risk of injuries or dan-
ger to life. Do not allow more than one per-
son to wear a single safety belt. Infants
and children are not allowed on an occu-
pant's lap, but must be transported and se-
cured in designated child restraint sys-
tems.
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when
safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause
additional injuries, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of inju-
ries or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing safety belts cor-
rectly.
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, may not be fully functional or
fail in the following situations:
– The safety belts or safety belt buckles
are damaged, soiled, or changed in
any other way.
– Belt tensioners or belt retractors
were modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged
in the event of an accident. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify
safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt ten-
sioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and
keep them clean. Have the safety belts
checked after an accident at the dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Correct use of safety belts
– Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight
to your body over your lap and should-
ers.
– Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
over your lap. The safety belt may not
press on your stomach.
Seite 103
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across
hard or fragile objects.
– Avoid thick clothing.
– Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up-
ward around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt
1. Slowly guide the safety belt out of the
holder when fastening it.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety
belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must
engage audibly.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-
up mechanism.
Middle safety belt in the rear
Buckling the safety belt
1. Pull the buckle tongues out of the
mounts in the roof.
2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the
belt buckle, arrow 1.
3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the
belt buckle, arrow 2.
Safety belt buckles must audibly click
into place.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Use the buckle tongue, arrow 1, to open
the second safety belt buckle, arrow 2.
4. Guide the safety belt to the mount in the
roofliner.
Seite 104
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Safety belt reminder for driver's
seat and front passenger seat
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light lights up and a
signal sounds. Make sure that the
safety belts are positioned correctly.
The safety belt reminder can also be acti-
vated if objects are placed on the front pas-
senger seat.
Front head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re-
moved or not correctly adjusted head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
– Before driving, install the removed
head restraints on the occupied seats.
– Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
– Adjust the distance so that the head
restraint is as close as possible to the
back of the head. Adjust the distance
via the backrest tilt as needed.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is
clear when moving the head restraint.
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck
area. There is a risk of injury.
– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-
ers.
– Do not hang objects, for instance
clothes hangers, directly on the head
restraint.
– Only use accessories that have been
determined to be safe for attachment
to a head restraint.
– Do not use any accessories, for in-
stance pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height: John Cooper
Works sport seat
The height of the head restraints cannot be
adjusted.
Adjusting the height
– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
– To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, move the head re-
straint up or down slightly, making sure it
engages properly.
Removing: John Cooper Works
sport seat
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Seite 105
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one
will be sitting in the seat in question.
1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest
forward.
2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the
head restraint.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re-
moved or not correctly adjusted head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
– Before driving, install the removed
head restraints on the occupied seats.
– Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
– Adjust the distance so that the head
restraint is as close as possible to the
back of the head. Adjust the distance
via the backrest tilt as needed.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is
clear when moving the head restraint.
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck
area. There is a risk of injury.
– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-
ers.
– Do not hang objects, for instance
clothes hangers, directly on the head
restraint.
– Only use accessories that have been
determined to be safe for attachment
to a head restraint.
– Do not use any accessories, for in-
stance pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height
– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
– To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, move the head re-
straint up or down slightly, making sure it
engages properly.
Seite 106
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Fold down
– To fold down: press the button, arrow 1,
and press down the head restraint, ar-
row 2.
– Forward: fold the head restraint toward
the front as far as it will go. Make sure
that the head restraint engages cor-
rectly.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory
function:
– Seat position.
– Exterior mirror position.
– Height of the Head-up Display.
General information
Different settings can be assigned to two
memory locations.
The adjustment of the lumbar support is not
stored.
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the seat is clear prior
to any adjustment.
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected movements of the
seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
a risk of an accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Overview
Storing
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3. Press button. The LED in the
button lights up.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the
LED is lit. The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automati-
cally.
Seite 107
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a switch for set-
ting the seat or one of the memory buttons
is pressed.
While driving, the seat position adjustment
on the driver's side is interrupted after a
short time.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat
positions is deactivated to save battery
power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
– Open or close the door or tailgate.
– Press a button on the remote control.
– Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is
more curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver
profile currently in use. When the vehicle is
unlocked via the remote control, the posi-
tion is automatically retrieved if the func-
tion, refer to page 92, is activated for this
purpose.
The current exterior mirror position can be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 107.
Safety information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traf-
fic behind could be incorrectly estimated,
for instance while changing lanes. There is
a risk of an accident. Estimate the distance
to the traffic behind by looking over your
shoulder.
Overview
1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-
itor
3 Folding in and out
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
Press button.
The mirror movement follows the
button movement.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust
the mirror by pressing the edges of the mir-
ror glass.
Seite 108
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Folding in and out
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehi-
cle can be damaged in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Be-
fore washing, fold in the mirrors by hand
or with the button.
Press button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap-
prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in
the following situations:
– In vehicle washes.
– On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out
automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically
heated whenever the ignition is switched
on.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is
automatically dimmed. Photocells in the
car's interior mirror, refer to page 110, are
used to control this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass
on the front passenger side is tilted down-
ward. This improves your view of the curb
and other low-lying obstacles when parking,
for instance.
Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's
side mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's
side mirror position.
Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Flip lever
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior
mirror, flip the lever forward.
Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect
by the interior mirror.
Seite 109
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
– In the mirror glass.
– On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements
– Keep the photocells clean.
– Do not cover the area between the inte-
rior mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the
steering wheel while the vehicle is sta-
tionary only.
Settings
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seating
position.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Seite 110
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause
the vehicle to move and endanger them-
selves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
– Releasing the parking brake.
– Opening and closing the doors or
windows.
– Engaging selector lever position N.
– Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
not leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle. Take the remote control
with you when exiting and lock the vehi-
cle.
Always transport children in the
rear seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children is in the rear seat.
Transport children younger than 13 years of
age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the
rear seat in suitable child restraint systems
designed for the age, weight and size of the
child. Children 13 years of age or older must
wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child
restraint system can no longer be used due
to their age, weight, and size.
Safety information
WARNING
The safety belt cannot be fastened cor-
rectly on children shorter than 5 ft,
150 cm without suitable additional child
restraint systems. The efficacy of safety
gear, including safety belts, can be limited
or lost when safety belts are fastened in-
correctly. An incorrectly fastened safety
belt can cause additional injuries, for in-
stance in the event of an accident or dur-
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Se-
cure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm us-
ing suitable child restraint systems.
Children on the front passenger
seat
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
knee, and side airbags on the front passen-
Seite 111
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
ger side are deactivated. Automatic deacti-
vation of front-seat passenger airbags, refer
to page 169.
Safety information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-
jure a child in a child restraint system
when the airbags are activated. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the front-
seat passenger airbags are deactivated and
that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-
tor light lights up.
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect
seat adjustment or improper installation of
the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the child re-
straint system fits securely against the
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head
restraints or remove them.
Installing child restraint sys-
tems
General information
Pay attention to the specifications of the
child restraint system manufacturer when
selecting, installing, and using child re-
straint systems.
Safety information
WARNING
The protective effect of damaged child re-
straint systems or of child restraint sys-
tems exposed to an accident and their fas-
tening systems can be limited or lost. A
child can e.g.,not sufficiently restrained,
for instance in the event of an accident or
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Have dam-
aged child restraint systems or of child re-
straint systems exposed to an accident and
their fastening systems checked and possi-
bly replaced by the dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or re-
pair shop.
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect
seat adjustment or improper installation of
the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the child re-
straint system fits securely against the
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head
restraints or remove them.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-
jure a child in a child restraint system
when the airbags are activated. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the front-
seat passenger airbags are deactivated and
Seite 112
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-
tor light lights up.
After installing a child restraint system in
the front passenger seat, make sure that the
front, knee and side airbags on the front
passenger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 169.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the highest
and thus best possible position for the belt
and to offer optimal protection in the event
of an accident.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is
located in front of the belt guide of the child
seat, move the front passenger seat care-
fully forward until the best possible belt
guide position is reached.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passen-
ger safety belt can be permanently locked to
fasten child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with
the safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and
pull it tight against the child restraint
system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-
pletely.
In some cases it may be necessary to sepa-
rate the lower belt attachment. Safety belts,
refer to page 103.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-
dren.
Pay attention to the operating and safety in-
formation of the child restraint system man-
ufacturer when installing and using LATCH
child restraint fixing systems.
Seite 113
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Mounts for the lower LATCH
anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach
the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com-
bined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg
when the child is restrained by the internal
harnesses.
Safety information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys-
tems are not correctly engaged, the protec-
tive effect of the LATCH child restraint
fixing system can be limited. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
that the lower anchors are securely en-
gaged and that the LATCH child restraint
fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.
Position
Symbol Meaning
The corresponding symbol
shows the mounts for the
lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower
anchors are marked with a
pair, 2, of LATCH symbols.
For vehicles equipped with
a middle seat:
It is not recommended to
use the inner lower anchors
of standard outer LATCH
positions to fasten a child
restraint system on the
middle seat. Use the vehicle
safety belt instead for the
middle seat.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of
the child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manu-
facturer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are
properly connected.
Child restraint systems with tether
strap
Safety information
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the
protective effect can be reduced. There is
a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper
retaining strap is not guided across sharp
edges and without twisting to the upper
retaining strap.
WARNING
If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro-
tective effect of the child restraint system
is limited or there is none. In particular
situations, for instance braking maneuvers
or in case of an accident, the rear backrest
can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Make sure that the rear
backrests are locked.
Seite 114
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
NOTICE
The anchors for the upper retaining straps
of child restraint systems are only pro-
vided for these retaining straps. When
other objects are mounted, the anchors
can be damaged. There is a risk of damage
to property. Only mount child restraint
systems to the upper retaining straps.
Anchors
The respective symbol shows the an-
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper top tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest or the rear window
shelf.
Routing the retaining strap
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the anchor
1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain-
ing strap between or along both sides of
the supports of the head restraint to the
anchor.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor on the rear seat.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
Locking the doors and win-
dows
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the out-
side only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in
the rear.
This locks various functions so that they
cannot be operated from the rear: safety
switch, refer to page 96.
Seite 115
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Start/Stop button, drive-ready
state
Concept
The following ready states can
be attained by pressing the
Start/Stop button:
– Radio-ready state on/off.
– Ignition on/off.
– Activating/deactivating drive-ready
state.
To activate drive-ready state, press the
brake pedal.
The drive-ready state cannot be activated as
long as the charging cable, refer to
page 254, is connected.
Switching radio-ready state on/off
The radio-ready state is activated by press-
ing the Start/Stop button in the following
situations:
– When the engine is running.
– When drive-ready state is activated.
– When the engine is switched off auto-
matically using the Auto Start/Stop
function.
Some electronic systems/power consumers
remain ready for operation.
Radio-ready state is switched off automati-
cally:
– If the driver's or front passenger door is
opened when exiting the vehicle, with
drive-ready state switched off manually.
– If the ignition is switched off manually
with the Start/Stop button.
– After approx. 8 minutes.
– When the vehicle is locked using the
central locking system.
– Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still
be started.
If the engine is switched off and the igni-
tion is switched on, the system automati-
cally switches to the radio-ready state if the
lights are switched off or, if correspondingly
equipped, the daytime running lights are
switched on.
Ignition on
Press the Start/Stop button, and do not
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied
length of time.
To save battery power when the engine is
off, switch off the ignition and any unneces-
sary electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off
Press the Start/Stop button again without
stepping on the brake.
Seite 116
CONTROLS Driving
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster
go out.
To save battery power when the engine is
off, switch off the ignition and any unneces-
sary electronic systems/power consumers.
Safety measures
The ignition is switched off automatically in
the following situations while the vehicle is
stationary and the engine is off:
– When locking the vehicle, and when the
low beams are switched on.
– Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still
be started. This function is only availa-
ble when the low beams are switched
off.
– When opening or closing the driver
door, if the driver's safety belt is un-
buckled and the low beams are switched
off.
– While the driver's safety belt is unbuck-
led with driver's door open and low
beams off.
– When the front doors are opened if
there is no other person sitting in the
front seats.
The low beams switch to parking lights af-
ter approx. 10 minutes of no use.
When the ignition is switched off automati-
cally by opening or closing the driver's door,
unbuckling the driver's safety belt or by the
automatic switching of the low beams to
parking lights, the radio-ready state remains
active.
Drive-ready state
When drive-ready state is activated, the ve-
hicle is operational. Activated drive-ready
state is the equivalent of a running engine
in conventional vehicles. Deactivated drive-
ready state is equivalent to switching the
ignition off.
Drive-ready state in detail
Concept
The following are the different drive-ready
state variants:
– Electric drive-ready state, refer to
page 118.
The vehicle is powered by the electric
motor.
– Starting the combustion engine, refer to
page 118.
The vehicle is powered by the combus-
tion engine.
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases
can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust
gases contain pollutants which are color-
less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep
the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient
ventilation.
WARNING
When driving in electric mode, pedes-
trians and other traffic might pay less at-
tention to the vehicle due to the lack of
engine noise. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively in-
tervene where appropriate.
Seite 117
Driving CONTROLS
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
lowing:
– Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
rection of the curb.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
stance with a wheel chock.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause
the vehicle to move and endanger them-
selves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
– Releasing the parking brake.
– Opening and closing the doors or
windows.
– Engaging selector lever position N.
– Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
not leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle. Take the remote control
with you when exiting and lock the vehi-
cle.
Activating drive-ready state
1. Close the driver's door.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Depending on the prerequisite, the electric
drive-ready state is possible or the engine
can be started.
Electric drive-ready state
General information
The vehicle is ready for driving without
starting the combustion engine.
Functional requirement
The electric drive-ready state is possible, if
the prerequisites for electric driving, refer
to page 120, are fulfilled.
Display
READY indicates drive-ready
state.
Combustion engine start
Functional requirements
The combustion engine is started with acti-
vation of the drive-ready state, refer to
page 118, under the following conditions:
– The temperature of the hybrid system is
too high or too low.
– The high-voltage battery has an insuffi-
cient charge.
Driving away
1. Activate drive-ready state.
2. Engage selector lever position D, M/S or
R.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Drive away.
Seite 118
CONTROLS Driving
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Deactivating drive-ready state
After stopping the vehicle:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
After parking the vehicle, you may hear
noises due to operation of the hybrid sys-
tem, such as for cooling of the high-voltage
battery.
Safety measure
The drive-ready state is deactivated auto-
matically after approx. 10 minutes when the
vehicle is stationary if, with the selector
lever in position P or N, the driver's door
has been opened and neither the brake
pedal nor the accelerator pedal have been
depressed.
Before driving into a vehicle wash
So that the vehicle can roll into a vehicle
wash, follow instructions for going into an
automatic vehicle wash, refer to page 313.
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save
fuel. The system switches off the combus-
tion engine when conditions for electric
driving have been met. The ignition or
drive-ready state remains switched on.
General information
READY is displayed in the instrument clus-
ter. If necessary, the combustion engine
starts automatically.
The combustion engine is also stopped dur-
ing the trip when rolling without accelera-
tion or braking. This driving condition, in
which the vehicle is traveling without
power and energy recovery is not active, is
referred to as coasting, refer to page 122.
The combustion engine is not switched off
automatically in the following situations:
– The combustion engine is not at operat-
ing temperature.
– The transmission selector lever is in po-
sition M/S.
– High-voltage battery is heavily dis-
charged or vehicle electrical system is
heavily burdened.
– High stress of the automatic climate
control in the heating or cooling phase.
– The hood is unlocked.
– The vehicle is being optimized for the
current driving style, for instance dur-
ing the break-in period or after a service
appointment.
– The hybrid system is malfunctioning.
Safety mode
An automatically stopped combustion en-
gine does not start independently:
– When the driver's door is open and nei-
ther the brake nor accelerator pedal are
depressed.
– When the hood is unlocked.
The indicator lights come on. The combus-
tion engine can only be started via the
Start/Stop button.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehi-
cle can be switched off permanently, for in-
stance when leaving it.
1. Press the Start/Stop button.
– The ignition is switched off.
– The radio-ready state is activated.
Seite 119
Driving CONTROLS
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– The Auto Start/Stop function is de-
activated.
– Engage selector lever position P.
2. Set the parking brake.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the combustion engine auto-
matically in the event of a malfunction. A
message is displayed. It is possible to con-
tinue driving. Have the system checked.
Electric driving: ePOWER.
General information
In ePOWER, the vehicle is driven exclu-
sively electrically. ePOWER works automat-
ically.
Depending on the charge state of the high-
voltage battery, maximum speed and range
achieved can vary.
For electrical driving, certain conditions, re-
fer to page 120, must be satisfied.
Displays of the hybrid system, refer to
page 139.
Safety information
WARNING
When driving in electric mode, pedes-
trians and other traffic might pay less at-
tention to the vehicle due to the lack of
engine noise. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively in-
tervene where appropriate.
Functional requirements
– State of charge and temperature of the
high-voltage battery is sufficient.
– Selector lever position D or R engaged.
– The accelerator pedal is only slightly de-
pressed.
– The possible maximum speed for elec-
tric driving is not exceeded.
– The driver's door is closed.
– MID or GREEN driving mode is selected.
eDRIVE button
General information
Using the eDRIVE button, the characteris-
tics of the hybrid system can be adjusted.
– MAX eDrive, refer to page 121
– Auto eDRIVE, refer to page 120
– SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 121
To switch between the individual function
modes, press the eDRIVE button up or
down.
Overview
eDRIVE button
Auto eDRIVE
General information
Auto eDRIVE is activated by default when
the vehicle is started via the Start/Stop but-
ton.
In Auto eDRIVE, the vehicle is driven in hy-
brid mode corresponding to the various
Seite 120
CONTROLS Driving
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
driving situations, i.e. the drive combines
combustion engine and electric motor. The
respectively most effective drive type is
preferred.
MAX eDRIVE
General information
The vehicle is driven exclu-
sively electrically.
If necessary, the maximum electrical speed
that applies to MAX eDRIVE may be delib-
erately exceeded with the aid of kickdown,
refer to page 135. The combustion engine
is automatically started and the system
switches to AUTO eDRIVE mode. Auto-
matic starting of the engine while driving,
refer to page 122.
Activating MAX eDRIVE
Press the button up repeatedly, un-
til MAX eDRIVE is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
When pressing the button, the current
eDRIVE setting is graphically displayed on
the Control Display.
Specifying eMAX eDRIVE as the
default mode
MAX eDRIVE can be specified as the de-
fault mode instead of AUTO eDRIVE.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Configure MAX eDRIVE"
4. "MAX eDRIVE by default"
Using the button:
1. Activate with the MAX eDRIVE
button.
2. "Configure MAX eDRIVE"
3. "MAX eDRIVE by default"
The function is available, if the prerequi-
sites for electric driving are fulfilled, refer
to page 120.
SAVE BATTERY
General information
The current charge state of
the high-voltage battery can
be maintained or increased
with SAVE BATTERY. The
electric range can be con-
served in this way for a later
point in the trip, for instance.
This charging process increases the average
fuel consumption.
The acceleration boost by the electric motor
may be restricted.
The function is only available if sufficient
fuel is available and in selector lever posi-
tion D.
Activating SAVE BATTERY
Press the button down repeatedly,
until SAVE with the battery symbol
is displayed in the instrument clus-
ter.
When pressing the button, the current
eDRIVE setting is graphically displayed on
the Control Display.
Seite 121
Driving CONTROLS
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Auto Start/Stop function, coasting
Concept
The combustion engine is automatically
stopped and disengaged from the drivetrain.
This driving condition of rolling is referred
to as coasting.
Functional requirements
Coasting is possible:
– The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged.
– Transmission position D is engaged.
– The drive system is at operating temper-
ature.
– GREEN Mode: when coasting, without
operating the brake, at speeds below
100 mph, approx. 160 km/h.
After coasting, the combustion or electric
motor restarts depending on the operating
state.
Acoustic pedestrian protection
Concept
Depending on the country-specific version,
the system generates a continuous driving
noise at standstill with the drive-ready state
activated and during electric driving up to
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
A speaker system broadcasts the noise to
the surroundings.
As a result, other traffic participants, for in-
stance pedestrians or cyclists, can better
perceive the vehicle.
Driving with the combustion
engine: POWER
Concept
The combustion engine provides the main
drive power to move the vehicle. If neces-
sary, the high-voltage battery is charged at
the same time.
Functional requirements
Automatic starting while driving
The combustion engine is automatically
started under the following conditions while
driving:
– During intense accelerations or on up-
hill grades.
– By pressing the accelerator pedal be-
yond the resistance point at the full
throttle position, kickdown.
– The high-voltage battery has an insuffi-
cient charge.
– Selector lever position M/S is engaged.
– The speed for electric driving is ex-
ceeded while accelerating.
– Adapting to the course of the road when
destination guidance is activated.
– System-related requirement for hybrid
components.
Automatic switching off while driving
When reducing speed, the combustion en-
gine is switched off when the conditions for
electric driving, refer to page 120, are met.
Seite 122
CONTROLS Driving
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Assistance from the electric
motor
Concept
The combustion engine provides the main
drive power to move the vehicle.
The electric motor provides assistance as
needed with additional propulsive power.
eASSIST
During normal vehicle operation, the elec-
tric motor assists the combustion engine,
depending on the situation. This assistance
reduces fuel consumption.
eBOOST
Accelerating quickly, such as when passing,
requires the maximum available power from
the electric motor. To do this, apply extra
force to the accelerator pedal.
Energy recovery: CHARGE
Concept
The hybrid system makes it possible to con-
vert kinetic energy into electrical energy
during braking and coasting. This recovered
energy charges the high-voltage battery. If
necessary, this stored electrical energy is
output to the electric motor.
General information
Depending on the setting of the MINI Driv-
ing Modes switch, the high-voltage battery
is charged at different speeds and the vehi-
cle is decelerated differently while coasting.
Functional requirements
Conditions such as the following must be
met to recover kinetic energy:
– The vehicle is moving.
– Selector lever position D, M/S is set.
– The high-voltage battery is not fully
charged.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Energy recovery displays in the instrument
cluster, refer to page 140.
Parking brake
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the ve-
hicle from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
lowing:
– Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
rection of the curb.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
stance with a wheel chock.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause
the vehicle to move and endanger them-
selves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Seite 123
Driving CONTROLS
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– Releasing the parking brake.
– Opening and closing the doors or
windows.
– Engaging selector lever position N.
– Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
not leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle. Take the remote control
with you when exiting and lock the vehi-
cle.
Overview
Parking brake
Setting
With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator light lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Depending on the stopping situation, the
parking brake is engaged automatically.
Steptronic transmission: in some parking
situations, the parking brake is automati-
cally engaged, when selector lever posi-
tion P is engaged. In these cases, the park-
ing brake is released automatically when
you leave the selector lever position P.
While driving
To use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle
brakes hard while the switch is being
pulled.
The indicator light lights up red, a
signal sounds and the brake lights
light up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete
stop, the parking brake is engaged.
Releasing
Releasing manually
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Steptronic transmission: press the
switch while the brake is pressed or se-
lector lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release in cars with
Steptronic transmission
For automatic release, step on the accelera-
tor pedal.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator under the
following conditions:
– Engine on.
– Drive mode engaged.
– Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of
the parking brake, secure the vehicle
against rolling using a wheel chock, for in-
stance when leaving it.
Seite 124
CONTROLS Driving
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
After a power failure
Putting the parking brake into
operation
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the switch while stepping on
the brake pedal or selector lever posi-
tion P is set.
It may take several seconds for the brake to
be put into operation. Any sounds associ-
ated with this are normal.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the park-
ing brake is ready for operation.
Turn signal, high beams, head-
light flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Canada: the lever returns into its starting
position after actuation. To switch off man-
ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance
point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The triple turn signal duration can be ad-
justed.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and
hold it there for as long as you want the
turn signal to flash.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
– High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low
beams are switched on.
– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-
row 2.
Seite 125
Driving CONTROLS
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Washer/wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
cause them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Defrost the windshield prior to switching
the wipers on.
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position
is reached.
– Resting position of the wipers, posi-
tion 0.
– Intermittent operation or rain sensor,
position 1.
– Normal wiper speed, position 2.
– Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper
system switched on: when travel continues,
the wipers resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
– Switching off: press the lever down until
it reaches its standard position.
– Brief wipe: press the lever down from
the standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its in-
itial position when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the
time between wipes depending on the in-
tensity of the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-
out the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
Seite 126
CONTROLS Driving
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Safety information
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle
washes.
Activating
Press the lever up once from its standard
position, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper op-
eration is deactivated.
Deactivating
Press the lever back into the standard posi-
tion.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel.
With deactivated rain sensor: set interval.
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-
sor sensitivity.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only
use the washer systems, if the washer
fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with
antifreeze, if needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not use the washer system when the
washer fluid reservoir is empty.
Seite 127
Driving CONTROLS
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the
windshield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper
Overview
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the outer switch upward.
– Resting position of the wiper, posi-
tion 0.
– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-
verse gear is engaged, the system
switches to continuous operation.
Clean the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direc-
tion.
– In resting position: turn the switch
downward, arrow 3. The switch auto-
matically returns to its resting position
when released.
– In intermittent mode: turn the switch
further, arrow 2. The switch automati-
cally returns to its intermittent position
when released.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-out position enables the wipers to
be folded away from the windshield.
General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for instance.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Defrost the windshield prior to switching
the wipers on.
Folding away the wipers
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
Seite 128
CONTROLS Driving
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
2. Press and hold the wiper level down, un-
til the wipers stop in a close to vertical
position.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from
the windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the
windshield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return
to their resting position and are ready
again for operation.
Canada: wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
cause them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Defrost the windshield prior to switching
the wipers on.
Switching on
Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-
ance point.
– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap
once beyond the resistance point.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Seite 129
Driving CONTROLS
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
– To switch off from fast wiper speed:
press down twice.
– To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
– Brief wipe: press down once.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the
time between wipes depending on the in-
tensity of the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-
out the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle
washes.
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper op-
eration is deactivated.
During trip interruption with the rain sen-
sor switched on: if the trip is resumed
within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor
is automatically activated again.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel.
With deactivated rain sensor: set interval.
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-
sor sensitivity.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Seite 130
CONTROLS Driving
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Windshield washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only
use the washer systems, if the washer
fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with
antifreeze, if needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not use the washer system when the
washer fluid reservoir is empty.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the
windshield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper
Overview
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the outer switch upward.
– Resting position of the wiper, posi-
tion 0.
– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-
verse gear is engaged, the system
switches to continuous operation.
Clean the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direc-
tion.
– In resting position: turn the switch
downward, arrow 3. The switch auto-
matically returns to its resting position
when released.
– In intermittent mode: turn the switch
further, arrow 2. The switch automati-
cally returns to its intermittent position
when released.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-out position enables the wipers to
be folded away from the windshield.
General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for instance.
Seite 131
Driving CONTROLS
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Defrost the windshield prior to switching
the wipers on.
Folding away the wipers
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press the wiper lever up beyond the
point of resistance and hold it for ap-
prox. 3 seconds, until the wipers remain
in a nearly vertical position
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from
the windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the
windshield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return
to their resting position and are ready
again for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one
reservoir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze
can be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Seite 132
CONTROLS Driving
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain harm-
ful substances and are flammable. There is
a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow
the instructions on the containers. Keep
antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do
not refill operating materials into different
bottles. Store operating materials out of
reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ra-
tio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many
individual states; do not exceed the allow-
able washer fluid dilution ratio limits that
apply. Follow the usage instructions on the
washer fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Con-
centrate or the equivalent is recom-
mended.
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Only add washer fluid when the en-
gine is cooled down. Next, fully close the
lid of the washer fluid reservoir.
NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer
fluid for the water-repelling effect on the
windows can lead to damage to the wash-
ing system. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not add silicon-containing ad-
ditives to the washer fluid.
NOTICE
Mixing different windshield washer con-
centrates or antifreeze can damage the
washing system. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not mix different wind-
shield washer concentrates or antifreeze.
Follow the information and mixing ratios
provided on the containers.
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer
concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can
lead to incorrect readings at temperatures
below +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Steptronic transmission
Concept
The Steptronic transmission combines the
functions of an automatic transmission with
the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Seite 133
Driving CONTROLS
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
lowing:
– Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
rection of the curb.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
stance with a wheel chock.
Selector lever version
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a
transmission with either a latching selector
lever or a tap-operated selector lever is in-
stalled.
Transmission with a latching selector
lever
The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D
are selected by moving the selector lever
into the respective selector lever position.
The selector lever engages in the selector
lever positions.
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle
operation. All gears for forward travel are
activated automatically.
Reverse R
Engage selector lever position R only when
the vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without
engine power in selector lever position N,
for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
page 135.
Parking position P
General information
Selector lever position, for instance for
parking the vehicle.
The transmission blocks the drive wheels in
selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when
the vehicle is stationary.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that
selector lever position P is set. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to move.
Engaging selector lever positions:
with a latching selector lever
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a drive mode, maintain pressure
on the brake pedal until you are ready to
start.
Seite 134
CONTROLS Driving
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Functional requirements
The selector lever can only be taken out of
selector lever position P if the ignition is on
or the engine is running.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R, or P
With the vehicle stationary, depress the
brake pedal before shifting out of selector
lever position P or N; otherwise, the shift
block will not be deactivated and the shift
command will not be executed.
A selector lever lock prevents the following
faulty operation:
– Unintentional shifting into selector
lever position P or R.
– Unintentional shifting from selector
lever position P into another selector
lever position.
1. To release the selector lever lock: with
the brake pedal depressed, press the
button on the front of the selector lever.
2. Move the selector lever into the desired
position.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll
without its own power for a short distance,
for instance in a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N:
with a latching selector lever
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and en-
gage selector lever position N.
5. Release brake.
The vehicle may roll.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be
able to change the selector lever position.
Manually unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 137.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driv-
ing performance. Step on the accelerator
pedal beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position.
Sport program M/S
Concept
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier
driving style. The transmission, for instance
shifts up later and the shifting times are
shorter.
Seite 135
Driving CONTROLS
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Activating the sport program
Press the selector lever to the left out of se-
lector lever position D.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is ac-
tivated.
eDRIVE electric driving and the Auto Start
Stop function are deactivated. Coasting to a
standstill and braking phases are used more
often to recover energy. Depending on the
driving situation, the high-voltage battery is
charged at different speeds. Fuel consump-
tion can increase.
Ending the Sport program
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Manual mode M/S
Concept
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual
mode.
Activating manual mode
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of
selector lever position D, arrow 1.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode M/S becomes active and the
gear is changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance M1.
Shifting
– To shift down: press the selector lever
forward.
– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-
wards.
The Steptronic transmission continues
shifting automatically in certain situations,
for instance when certain engine speed lim-
its are reached.
Ending the manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is
displayed, for example P.
Seite 136
CONTROLS Driving
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Releasing the transmission lock
manually: with a latching selector
lever
If the selector lever is locked in selector
lever position P despite the ignition being
switched on, the brake pedal being de-
pressed and the button on the selector lever
being pressed, the transmission lock can be
unlocked manually:
Before unlocking the transmission lock
manually, set the parking brake to prevent
the vehicle from rolling away.
1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve, to-
gether with the lower retaining ring,
from the center console. To do so, pull
the retaining ring upward at the rear
edge.
2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connec-
tor, if needed.
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard
vehicle tool kit, refer to page 294, press
the yellow release lever downward, see
arrow.
4. Press the button on the front of the se-
lector lever and move the selector lever
back slightly.
Release the release lever.
5. Bring the selector lever into the desired
position.
For additional information, see the chapter
on tow-starting and towing.
Seite 137
Driving CONTROLS
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Instrument cluster
Overview
1 Displays of the hybrid system 139
2 Indicator/warning lights
3 Speedometer
4 Fuel gauge 146
5 Display/reset miles 146
6 Electronic displays 139
Seite 138
CONTROLS Displays
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Electronic displays
1 Driver assistance systems
Messages, for instance Check Control
Time 147
External temperature 146
Selection lists 151
Total miles/trip odometer 146
Onboard Computer 151
Charging screen 139
2 Selector lever position 133
3 MINI Driving Modes switch sta-
tus 189
eDRIVE mode status 120
Charging screen
1 Charging status 259
2 Timer, departure time 259
3 End of charging time 259
Departure time with timer 259
4 Stationary climate control 259
Displays of the hybrid system
Displays in the instrument cluster
General information
The following functions of the hybrid sys-
tem are displayed:
– High-voltage battery charge indicator,
refer to page 140.
Seite 139
Displays CONTROLS
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– Drive-ready state: READY, refer to
page 140.
– Electric driving: ePOWER, refer to
page 140.
– Energy recovery: CHARGE, refer to
page 140.
– Acceleration boost: eBOOST, refer to
page 140.
– Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE, refer to
page 141.
– SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 141.
The display depends on the system's operat-
ing condition.
High-voltage battery charge indicator
The Onboard Computer in the instrument
cluster can indicate the charge state of the
high-voltage battery.
Drive-ready state: READY
READY indicates drive-ready
state. For further information,
see Drive-ready state in detail,
refer to page 117.
Electric driving: ePOWER.
In ePOWER mode, the range for electric
driving is colored yellow, arrow 1. The
range highlighted in yellow can vary de-
pending on the driving situation and
eDRIVE mode.
A pointer indicates the power outputted by
the hybrid drive in a scale, arrow 2.
If the pointer is outside the range high-
lighted in yellow, the combustion engine is
switched on, arrow 3.
For further information, refer to Electric
driving: ePOWER.
Energy recovery: CHARGE
Energy recovery during coasting and brak-
ing is indicated as CHARGE in the instru-
ment cluster depending on the driving
mode, see arrow. The high-voltage battery is
charged. If the high-voltage battery is com-
pletely charged, no energy can be recov-
ered.
For further information, please refer to En-
ergy recovery CHARGE, refer to page 123.
Acceleration boost: eBOOST
If the electric motor supports the combus-
tion engine, for instance during rapid accel-
eration, eBOOST, refer to page 123, is dis-
played. Depending on the available charge
Seite 140
CONTROLS Displays
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
state of the high-voltage battery, there
could be more or less eBOOST available. If
the charge state of the high-voltage battery
is low, eBOOST may not be available.
Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE
The display becomes active af-
ter MAX eDRIVE, refer to
page 121, is activated via the
eDRIVE button.
SAVE BATTERY
The display becomes active af-
ter SAVE BATTERY, refer to
page 121, is activated via the
eDRIVE button.
The high-voltage energy available for elec-
tric driving is conserved for a later point in
the trip.
Indications on the Control Display
Current vehicle state
General information
The following are displayed:
– Active components of the hybrid sys-
tem:
Orange: energy flow of the combustion
engine.
Yellow: energy flow of the hybrid sys-
tem.
– Vehicle states:
– ePOWER.
– POWER.
– eBOOST.
– CHARGE.
– Coasting.
– Charging.
– System requirements of the hybrid sys-
tem, for instance drive system not yet
warmed up to operating temperature.
– Driving requirement, for instance trans-
mission selector lever in the M/S posi-
tion.
Displaying the energy flow
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"
Adapting to the course of the road
Concept
When the navigation system destination
guidance is active, hybrid operation adapts
to specific route sections.
Use of the hybrid system is optional.
Situations which are already underway and
situations ahead are detected, indicated on
the Control Display, and the hybrid drive is
adapted and prepared for them.
The function may be restricted if the navi-
gation data is invalid, outdated or not avail-
able, for example.
Functional requirements
– Selector lever position D engaged.
– AUTO eDRIVE hybrid mode is activated.
Displaying the adaptation to the course of
the road
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"
The symbol on the Control Display
indicates that the function is active.
Seite 141
Displays CONTROLS
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Display
Example: residential area or area with low
speed limits. ePOWER electric driving is
being prepared. When the residential area
is reached, electric driving takes prece-
dence.
Other situations are also shown on the Con-
trol Display:
– Downhill gradients: the system is ready
to charge the high-voltage battery.
– Target zone: ePOWER electric driving is
being prepared.
– GREEN Mode:
Energy distribution: the electrical en-
ergy is conserved for a later point.
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors func-
tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal-
functions in the monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights
and SMS text messages in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be out-
put and a SMS text message may appear on
the Control Display.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator/warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when
the engine is started or the ignition is
switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Indicator light flashes or is illumi-
nated: safety belt on the driver or
passenger side is not buckled. The
safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger
seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are posi-
tioned correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
Release the parking brake, refer to
page 124.
Brake system
Braking system impaired. Continue
to drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Seite 142
CONTROLS Displays
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Approach control warning
Indicator light illuminates: advance
warning is issued, for example when
there is the impending danger of a
collision or the distance to the vehicle
ahead is too small.
Increase distance.
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the
imminent danger of a collision when the ve-
hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela-
tively high differential speed.
Intervention by braking or make an evasive
maneuver.
Person warning
If a collision with a person detected
in this way is imminent, the symbol
lights up and a signal sounds.
Orange lights
Active Cruise Control
The number bars shows the selected
distance from the vehicle driving
ahead.
Camera-based cruise control, refer to
page 191.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle
has been detected ahead of you.
Indicator light flashes: the condi-
tions are not adequate for the system to
work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Braking force boost may not be
working. Avoid abrupt braking. Take
the longer braking distance into ac-
count.
Have the system immediately
checked by a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC con-
trols the drive and braking forces.
The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce
speed and modify your driving style to the
driving circumstances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal-
functioned.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s serv-
ice center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
DSC, refer to page 187.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Control is activated
DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti-
vated.
DSC, refer to page 187, and DTC, re-
fer to page 188.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss
of tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau-
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 176.
Seite 143
Displays CONTROLS
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light lights up: the Tire
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire
inflation pressure or a flat tire. Fol-
low the information in the Check Control
message.
The indicator light flashes and then contin-
uously lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire
inflation pressure can be detected.
– Interference caused by systems or devi-
ces with the same radio frequency: after
leaving the area of the interference, the
system automatically becomes active
again.
– TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics
is mounted: have it checked by a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop as needed.
– Malfunction: have the system checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 171.
Steering system
Steering system in some cases not
working.
Have the system checked by a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
Emissions
– The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating.
Have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
– The warning light flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive
misfiring in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief
period can seriously damage emission
control components, in particular the
catalytic converter.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 293.
Acoustic pedestrian protection inactive
Acoustic pedestrian protection deac-
tivated or possibly not working.
Have the system checked by a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indi-
cator light indicates that a turn sig-
nal bulb has failed.
Turn signal, refer to page 125.
Parking lights, headlight
Parking lights or headlights are
switched on.
Parking lights/low beams, headlight
control, refer to page 161.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are switched on.
Front fog lights, refer to page 164.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off
automatically depending on the traf-
fic situation.
Seite 144
CONTROLS Displays
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 163.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It main-
tains the speed that was set using
the control elements on the steering
wheel.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 125.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the
malfunction is eliminated. If several mal-
functions occur at once, the messages are
displayed consecutively.
The messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis-
played again automatically.
Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The
Check Control messages are stored and can
be displayed again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message
is displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a
symbol in the instrument cluster explain a
Check Control message and the meaning of
the indicator/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as on the
cause of an error or the required action, can
be called up via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will
be automatically displayed on the Control
Display.
Further help
Depending on the Check Control message,
further help can be selected.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select the desired setting.
– "Owner's Manual"
Seite 145
Displays CONTROLS
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Display additional information about
the Check Control message in the
Integrated Owner's Manual.
– "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or
repair shop.
– "MINI Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving
are displayed again after the ignition is
switched off.
Fuel gauge
The arrow beside the fuel
pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel
filler flap is on.
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
Information on refueling, refer to page 262.
The yellow indicator light illumi-
nates, once the fuel reserve is
reached.
Odometer and trip odometer
Concept
The total number of kilometers driven and
the number of kilometers driven since the
last reset are displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Reset the trip odometer
Press the button.
– The odometer is displayed
when the ignition is
switched off.
– When the ignition is
switched on, the trip od-
ometer is reset.
External temperature
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a sig-
nal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for in-
stance on bridges or shady sections of
road. There is a risk of an accident. Modify
your driving style to the weather condi-
tions at low temperatures.
Display
The external temperature is
displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Seite 146
CONTROLS Displays
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Time
The time is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
The time can be set via the
Central Information Display
(CID).
Date
The date is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
The date can be set via the
Central Information Display
(CID).
Range
Concept
The range indicates the distance that can
still be covered with the current fuel level
and the electric energy of the high-voltage
battery.
General information
The range can be displayed as range for
electric driving or as total range. The total
range considers the capacity of the fuel
tank as well as the electric energy in the
high-voltage battery. If the requirements for
electric driving are not met, the total range
considers the content of the fuel tank only.
Various factors, such as the automatic cli-
mate control settings, are taken into ac-
count when calculating the electric range.
The electric range value is adapted dynami-
cally.
The following factors are taken into account
when calculating the range:
– Automatic climate control settings.
– Driving style.
– Traffic conditions.
– Program changes via the MINI Driving
Modes switch.
– Climate and terrain conditions.
With a low remaining range:
– A Check Control message is displayed
briefly.
– The remaining range is shown on the
Onboard Computer.
– With a dynamic driving style, for in-
stance taking curves aggressively, the
engine function is not always ensured.
The Check Control message is continuously
displayed below a certain range.
As soon as a respectively low fuel tank fill-
ing level is reached, MAX eDRIVE is auto-
matically selected to protect the combustion
engine if the requirements for electric driv-
ing are met. The Steptronic Sport program is
not available.
You may continue driving with reduced per-
formance and exclusively with electric mo-
tor power.
Follow further information on refueling.
Safety information
NOTICE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer
have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are
not ensured anymore. There is a risk of
damage to property. Refuel promptly.
Seite 147
Displays CONTROLS
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
NOTICE
If the range is too small, the normal drive
power is not available. Engine functions
are not ensured. There is a risk of damage
to property. Refuel as soon as possible.
Display, electric range
In MAX eDRIVE mode, the
electric range can be dis-
played via the Onboard Com-
puter in the instrument clus-
ter.
The display indicates that the
high-voltage battery is almost
fully discharged or the electric
drive is currently not availa-
ble.
Display total range
The current total range is dis-
played in the instrument clus-
ter.
Displaying the cruising range
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Range"
Current consumption
Concept
The current fuel consumption of the com-
bustion engine and of the electric motor can
be displayed.
Display, electric motor
The current electric consumption is dis-
played on the Onboard Computer.
The current electric energy
consumption or generation
can be monitored.
Consumed energy: + sign
Generated energy: - sign
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Current consumption"
Service requirements
Concept
The function displays the service require-
ments and the corresponding maintenance
scopes.
General information
After the ignition is switched on the instru-
ment cluster briefly displays available driv-
ing distance or time to the next scheduled
maintenance.
Seite 148
CONTROLS Displays
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
A service advisor can read out the current
service requirements from your remote con-
trol.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the type of service re-
quired may be displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and
legally mandated inspections are dis-
played.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed infor-
mation.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently re-
quired.
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally
mandated inspection is ap-
proaching.
The service deadline has al-
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle
inspections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections is automati-
cally transmitted to your dealer’s service
center before your vehicle is due for serv-
ice.
You can check when your dealer’s service
center was notified.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Teleservice Call"
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi-
mum permitted speed in the instrument
cluster.
General information
The camera at the base of the interior mir-
ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the
road as well as variable overhead sign posts.
Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet
road conditions, etc., are also detected and
compared with the vehicle's onboard data,
such as from the rain sensor, and will be
displayed depending on the situation.
Seite 149
Displays CONTROLS
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
With the navigation system, the system
takes into account the information stored in
the navigation data and also displays speed
limits present on routes without signs.
Without a navigation system, the system is
subject to limitations imposed by technol-
ogy. Traffic signs with speed limitations are
detected and displayed only. Speed limita-
tions due to entering or exiting towns, high-
way signs, etc. are not displayed. Speed lim-
its with extra text characters are always
displayed.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv-
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traf-
fic closely and actively intervene where
appropriate.
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior
mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior
mirror clean and clear.
Display
Speed Limit Info is displayed via the On-
board Computer.
Press button on the turn signal lever several
times, if needed.
Speed Limit Info is displayed on the Info
Display in the instrument cluster.
Speed Limit Info
The last speed limit detected.
Without a navigation system
the traffic signals are grayed
out after curves or longer
stretches of roadway.
With navigation system:
Speed Limit Info is not availa-
ble.
Without navigation system:
no speed limit or cancellation
is detected.
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the
following situations:
Seite 150
CONTROLS Displays
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall.
– When signs are fully or partially con-
cealed by objects, stickers or paint.
– When driving very close to the vehicle
in front of you.
– When driving toward bright lights or
strong reflections.
– When the windshield in front of the in-
terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
ered by a sticker, etc.
– In the event of incorrect detection by
the camera.
– If the speed limits stored in the naviga-
tion system are incorrect.
– In areas not covered by the navigation
system.
– When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
– When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
– If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
– When signs that are valid for a parallel
road are detected.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery.
Selection lists
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
buttons on the steering wheel and the dis-
play in the instrument cluster can be used
to display or use the following:
– Current audio source.
– Redial phone feature.
– Turn on voice activation system.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
Button on the
steering wheel
Function
Move selection up.
Move selection
down.
Confirm the selec-
tion.
Display
Onboard Computer
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different
vehicle data in the instrument cluster, such
as average values.
Seite 151
Displays CONTROLS
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Calling up information on the Info
Display
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Information is displayed in the Info Display
of the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Info Display
Repeatedly pressing the but-
ton on the turn signal lever
calls up the following informa-
tion in the Info Display:
– Total range.
– Range, electric.
– Average consumption, fuel.
– Average consumption, electric.
– Current consumption, fuel.
– Current consumption, electric.
– Average speed.
– Charge state of the high-voltage battery.
– Date.
– Engine temperature display.
– With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation:
Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated
in the navigation system.
– With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation:
Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated
in the navigation system.
– Speed Limit Info.
– Speed.
The unit of some information can be
changed.
Setting units, refer to page 57.
Selecting information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you
can select what information from the On-
board Computer can be displayed on the
Info Display of the instrument cluster.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range avail-
able with the remaining fuel.
The range is calculated based on your driv-
ing style over the last 20 miles/30 km.
High-voltage battery charge indicator
Concept
Indicates the current charge state of the
high-voltage battery as a percentage.
Seite 152
CONTROLS Displays
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Safety information
WARNING
Even when it is indicated that the high-
voltage battery is discharged, the high-
voltage system is always still under high
voltage. There is a risk of fire or a risk of
injury. Do not touch or change live parts,
for instance orange high-voltage cables,
even when the batteries are discharged.
Display
A marking is displayed when SAVE BAT-
TERY is activated; see arrow. The marking
indicates the high-voltage battery charge
state that is to be maintained or achieved
by means of energy recovery.
Average fuel consumption
This is calculated for the period while the
engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated
for the distance traveled since the last reset
by the Onboard Computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with
the engine manually stopped are not in-
cluded in the calculation of the average
speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Engine temperature display
Concept
Displays the current engine temperature,
based on a combination of coolant and en-
gine oil temperature. As soon as the opti-
mum operating temperature has been at-
tained, the indicator is in the center
position.
General information
If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en-
gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed too.
When the engine temperature is too
high, a red indicator light is dis-
played.
When the engine oil temperature is
too high, a red indicator light is dis-
played.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 290.
Seite 153
Displays CONTROLS
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Display
With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation: distance to
destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the
navigation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted
automatically.
With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation: time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is displayed if
a destination is entered in the navigation
system before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi-
mum permitted speed in the instrument
cluster.
Onboard Computer on the Control
Display
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different
vehicle data on the Control Display, such as
average values.
General information
Two types of Onboard Computers are availa-
ble on the Control Display:
– "Onboard info": average values, such as
the fuel consumption, are displayed. The
values can be reset individually.
– "Trip computer": the values deliver an
overview of a certain distance and can
be reset as often as necessary.
Calling up the Onboard Computer or
trip computer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the Onboard Computer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"
Resetting the trip computer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the Controller to the left, if
needed.
– "Reset": all values are reset.
– "Automatic reset": all values are
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehi-
cle has come to a standstill.
5. If necessary, "OK"
Seite 154
CONTROLS Displays
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Driving Excitement
Concept
On the Control Display, sport instruments
can be displayed, and the vehicle state can
be checked before the use of the SPORT
program.
Sport instruments
General information
On the Control Display, values for power
and torque are displayed.
Displaying sport instruments
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"
4. "Sports instruments"
Via MINI Driving Modes switch:
1. Activate SPORT.
2. "Sport displays"
3. "Sports instruments"
Vehicle state
The following vehicle and surrounding area
data is automatically checked and evaluated
in succession:
– Range.
– Engine temperature.
– External temperature.
– SPORT program state.
Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle
state is displayed.
Checking vehicle state
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"
4. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Via the MINI Driving Modes switch:
1. Activate SPORT.
2. "Sport displays"
3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Speed warning
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached
will cause a warning to be issued.
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
exceeds the set speed limit again, after it
has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired
speed is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
Seite 155
Displays CONTROLS
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
LED ring on the central in-
strument cluster
Concept
The LED ring displays light animations to
represent specific functions.
Basic displays
Basic functions, for instance the tachome-
ter, can be set to be displayed continually if
so desired.
Event displays
Functions that are only displayed tempora-
rily, for instance the volume or temperature
settings, can be set as event displays.
Several vehicle assistance functions can
also be displayed on the LED ring. This dis-
play corresponds with the displays of the
function in the respective display.
Example: tachometer
Like the tachometer in the instrument clus-
ter, the light animations of the tachometer's
basic display show the current RPMs and
the respective RPM warning thresholds.
Display
– Arrow 1: current RPM.
– Arrow 2: prewarning field.
– Arrow 3: warning field.
Switching on/off LED ring
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Center Instrument"
Adjusting the LED ring
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Basic display" or "Event display"
6. Select the desired setting.
Seite 156
CONTROLS Displays
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Setting the brightness
The brightness can be adjusted when night
lighting is active in the instrument cluster.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired
brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Head-up Display
Concept
This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, for instance
the speed.
The driver can get information without
averting his or her eyes from the road.
General information
Follow the instructions for cleaning the
Head-up Display. For additional informa-
tion, see the chapter on care.
Safety information
WARNING
When extending and retracting the projec-
tion screen of the Head-up Display, body
parts can be jammed. There is a risk of in-
jury. Make sure that the area of movement
of the projection screen is clear during
opening and closing.
NOTICE
The Head-up Display consists of sensitive
components that can easily be scraped or
damaged. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not place any objects on the
Head-up Display, attach to system compo-
nents or plug into the system. Do not
move the moving parts manually.
Overview
Switching the Head-up Display
on/off
When switching on, the projection lens of
the Head-up Display is extended. When
switching off, the projection lens of the
Head-up Display is retracted again.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on
the Head-up Display:
– Speed.
Seite 157
Displays CONTROLS
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– Navigation instructions.
– Check Control messages.
– Selection list from the instrument clus-
ter.
– Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. Select the desired displays in the Head-
up Display.
Settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to
the ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired
brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be
additionally influenced using the instru-
ment lighting, refer to page 165.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Adjusting the height
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Height"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired
height is reached.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
The height of the Head-up Display can also
be stored using the memory function, refer
to page 107.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be
rotated around its own axis.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is selected.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following fac-
tors:
Seite 158
CONTROLS Displays
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– Certain sitting positions.
– Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis-
play.
– Sunglasses with certain polarization fil-
ters.
– Wet roads.
– Unfavorable light conditions.
Country timer
Concept
The system provides information on how
long and to what degree the vehicle was
driven on inclined, uneven, unpaved or
snow-covered roads, for example.
General information
The system consists of the following two
menus:
– Country Timer: display of the gradient
and unevenness of the routes traveled.
– Country Timer Info: display of the best
time and total time since the last reset.
Follow the notes on traveling on poor roads,
refer to page 244.
Opening the menu
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "MINI Country Timer"
3. Select the desired setting.
– : display of the Country Timer.
– : display of the Country Timer
Info.
Display of the Country Timer
Overview
– Symbols for road gradient and uneven-
ness, arrow 1.
– Category, arrow 2.
– Pulse value, arrow 3.
Symbols, pulse deflection and pulse
value
When the vehicle is being driven on in-
clined or uneven roads, the corresponding
symbol lights up, arrow 1. One or more
pulse deflections are displayed and the
pulse value increases, arrow 3.
Categories
As the pulse value increases, the vehicle be-
comes larger and reaches various levels, ar-
row 2.
Display of the Country Timer Info
Best time
The shortest driving time necessary to
reach the highest level.
Total time
The total driving time that the vehicle was
driven at the highest level.
Seite 159
Displays CONTROLS
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Resetting the Country Timer Info
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "MINI Country Timer"
3. "MINI Country Timer Info"
4. Select desired setting:
– "Reset record time and display": re-
setting the best time.
– "Reset total time": resetting the total
time.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per-
formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
– "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat
Tire Monitor, refer to page 176.
– "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
page 171.
– "Engine oil level": Electronic en-
gine oil level check, refer to page 286.
– "Check Control": Check Control mes-
sages are stored in the background and
can be displayed on the Control Display.
Displaying stored Check Control mes-
sages, refer to page 145.
– "Service required": Displaying serv-
ice requirements, refer to page 148.
– "Teleservice Call": service request.
Seite 160
CONTROLS Displays
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to
the steering wheel.
Symbol Function
Rear fog light.
Front fog lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Cornering light.
Symbol Function
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Parking lights, low beams and
roadside parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the igni-
tion is switched off, the exterior lighting is
automatically switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended
periods; otherwise, the battery may become
discharged and it would then be impossible
to start the engine.
Canada: when parking, switch on the one-
sided roadside parking light, refer to
page 162.
Low beams
Position of switch:
Seite 161
Lights CONTROLS
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Canada: roadside parking light
Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With radio-ready state switched off, press
the lever either up or down past the resist-
ance point for approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance
point in the opposite direction.
Welcome lights and headlight
courtesy delay feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
the ambient brightness, individual light
functions may be switched on briefly when
the vehicle is unlocked.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch: ,
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Welcome lights"
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay illuminated for a partic-
ular time if the high beams are switched on
after radio-ready state is switched off.
Canada: the low beams stay illuminated for
a particular time if the headlight flasher is
switched on after radio-ready state is
switched off.
Setting the duration
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set length of time.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Automatic headlight control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off au-
tomatically depending on the ambient
brightness, for instance in tunnels, in twi-
light or if there is precipitation.
Seite 162
CONTROLS Lights
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon
can cause the lights to be switched on.
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator light in the instrument cluster
is illuminated when the low beams are
switched on.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judg-
ment of lighting conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to de-
tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa-
tions, switch the light on manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when
the ignition is switched on. After the igni-
tion is switched off, the parking lights light
up in position .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights
are mandatory, so it may not be possible to
deactivate the daytime running lights.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the remote control
currently used.
Cornering light
General information
Position of switch:
In tight curves, for instance on mountain-
ous roads or when turning, an additional,
cornering light is switched on that lights up
the inside of the curve when the vehicle is
moving below a certain speed.
The cornering light is automatically
switched on depending on the steering an-
gle or the use of turn signals.
Adaptive headlight range con-
trol
The adaptive headlight range control com-
pensates for acceleration and braking oper-
ations in order not to blind the oncoming
traffic and to achieve optimum illumination
of the roadway.
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traf-
fic participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depend-
ing on the traffic situation.
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the
high beams are switched on, whenever the
traffic situation allows. In the low speed
range, the high beams are not switched on
by the system.
The system responds to light from oncom-
ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you,
and to ambient lighting, for instance in
towns and cities.
Seite 163
Lights CONTROLS
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
The high beams can be switched on and off
manually at any time.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle
equipment: ,
Press and hold button on signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched
between low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster lights up when the sys-
tem switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated
when manually switching the high beams
on and off, refer to page 125.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant,
press the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judg-
ment of when to use the high beams. In sit-
uation that require this, therefore switch off
manually.
The system is not fully functional in the fol-
lowing situations, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
– In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
– When detecting poorly-lit road users
such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback
riders and wagons; when driving close
to train or ship traffic; or at animal
crossings.
– In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres-
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured
oncoming traffic on highways.
– In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
– When the windshield in front of the in-
terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
ered with stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
Concept
The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams to illuminate a wider area of the
roadway.
Functional requirement
The low beams must be switched on before
switching on the front fog lights.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The green indicator light lights up if
the front fog lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 162, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on
the front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher
are activated, the front fog lights are not
switched on.
Seite 164
CONTROLS Lights
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Settings
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour-
tesy lights are controlled automatically.
Thumbwheel for the instrument lighting
controls brightness of some of these fea-
tures.
Overview
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
3 Ambient light
Switching the interior lights on/off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Switching the reading lights on and
off manually
Press button.
The reading lights are located in the front
next to the interior light.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, light-
ing can be adjusted for some lights in the
car's interior.
Activating/deactivating
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Changing color
Push the switch forward or back:
manual color change.
Press the switch forward or back-
ward and hold for approx. 3 seconds,
until the ambient light illuminates
Seite 165
Lights CONTROLS
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
several times: automatic color change. Push
the switch again to end color changes.
Setting the brightness
Depending on the equipment, the bright-
ness of the ambient light can be adjusted
via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting or on the Control Display.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 166
CONTROLS Lights
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and
the front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone would
not provide adequate protection.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports
the side of the body in the chest and lap
area.
Seite 167
Safety CONTROLS
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to re-
duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle
occupants through side windows during
rollovers or side impact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a fron-
tal impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact
situation, for instance in less severe acci-
dents or rear-end collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de-
ployment area of the airbags is impaired,
the airbag system cannot provide protec-
tion as intended and may cause additional
injuries due to triggering. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Follow the in-
formation on achieving the optimum pro-
tective effect of the airbag system.
– Keep a distance from the airbags.
– Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to
keep the risk of injury to your hands or
arms as low as possible when the airbag
is triggered.
– Make sure that the front passenger is
sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her
feet and legs in the floor area and does
not support them on the dashboard.
– Make sure that occupants keep their
heads away from the side airbag.
– There should be no additional persons,
animals or objects between an airbag
and a person.
– Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not
attach adhesive labels or coverings and
do not attach brackets or cables, for in-
stance for GPS devices or mobile
phones.
– Do not apply adhesive materials to the
airbag cover panels, do not cover them
or modify them in any way.
– Do not use the cover of the front airbag
on the front passenger side as a storage
area.
– Do not place slip covers, seat cushions
or other objects on the front passenger
seat that are not specifically suited for
seats with integrated side airbags.
– Do not place seat cushions or other ob-
jects on the front seats that are not spe-
cifically suited for seats with integrated
side airbags.
– Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
– Never modify either the individual com-
ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys-
tem. This also applies to steering wheel
covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
– Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situa-
tions.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with dis-
abilities may affect the air bag system; con-
Seite 168
CONTROLS Safety
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
tact MINI Customer Relations for further in-
formation.
Warnings and information on the airbags
are also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a
risk of injury. Do not touch individual
components.
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to fail-
ure, malfunction or unintentional trigger-
ing of the airbag system. In the case of a
malfunction, the airbag system might not
trigger as intended despite the accident
severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan-
ger to life. Have the airbag system
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap-
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on,
the warning light in the instrument
cluster lights up briefly and thereby
indicates the operational readiness of the
entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
– Warning light does not come on when
the ignition is switched on.
– The warning light lights up continu-
ously.
Automatic deactivation of the
front-seat passenger airbags
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat
is occupied by measuring the human body's
resistance.
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger's side are activated or deacti-
vated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front pas-
senger seat, refer to the safety information
and instructions for children on the front
passenger seat, see Children.
Safety information
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
function, the system must be able to de-
tect whether a person is sitting in the
front passenger seat. The entire seat cush-
ion area must be used for this purpose.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the floor area.
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and
adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may
be deactivated in certain sitting positions.
In this case, the indicator light for the front-
seat passenger airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so
that the front-seat passenger airbags are ac-
tivated and the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags,
have the person sit in the rear.
Seite 169
Safety CONTROLS
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
To enable correct recognition of the occu-
pied seat cushion.
– Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger
seat unless they are specifically deter-
mined to be safe for use on the front
passenger seat.
– Do not place any electronic devices on
the front passenger seat if a child re-
straint system is to be installed on it.
– Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
– No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator light for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passen-
ger airbags indicates the operating state of
the front-seat passenger airbags.
The light indicates whether the airbags are
either activated or deactivated.
– The indicator light lights
up when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint
system or when the seat is
empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are
not activated.
– The indicator light does not light up
when, for instance a correctly seated
person of sufficient size is detected on
the seat. The airbags on the front pas-
senger side are activated.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children
seated in a child restraint system, particu-
larly in child restraint systems required by
NHTSA at the point in time when the vehi-
cle was manufactured. After installing a
child restraint system, make sure that the
indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up. This indicates that the
child restraint system has been detected
and the front-seat passenger airbags are not
activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-
seat passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front-seat passenger airbags very much de-
pends on the positions of the driver's/front
passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function
over the long-term, calibrate the front seats
as soon as a relevant Check Control mes-
sage is displayed. A message also appears
on the Control Display.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the seat is clear prior
to any adjustment.
An appropriate Check Control message is
displayed.
1. Move the respective seat all the way for-
ward.
2. Move the respective seat forward again.
The seat moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi-
tion.
Seite 170
CONTROLS Safety
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
The calibration procedure is completed
when the Check Control message disap-
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed,
repeat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re-
peat calibration, have the system checked
as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure
in the four mounted tires. The system warns
you if there is a significant loss of pressure
in one or more tires.
General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire
inflation pressure and, depending on the
model, the tire temperature.
With use of the system follow further infor-
mation found under Tire inflation pressure,
refer to page 266.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for
the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a
loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:
– After a tire or wheel replacement, a re-
set was performed with the correct tire
inflation pressure.
– After the tire inflation pressure was ad-
justed to a new value, a reset was per-
formed.
– Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
Status display
Current status
The system status can be displayed on the
Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys-
tem is active.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
Tire conditions
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a SMS text message
on the Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning re-
lated to the tire inflation pressures stored
during the last reset.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation
pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire infla-
tion pressure losses.
Possible causes:
– Malfunction.
– The system is being reset.
Additonal information
The status control display additionally
shows the current tire inflation pressures. It
shows the actual values read; they may vary
depending on driving style or weather con-
ditions.
Seite 171
Safety CONTROLS
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Resetting the system
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Reset the tire inflation pressure using
"Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the
following is displayed "Resetting Tire
Pressure Monitor…".
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h
for a short period, the set tire inflation pres-
sures are accepted as reference values. The
resetting process is completed automati-
cally while driving.
After successful completion of the reset, the
tires appear in green on the Control Display
and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label
for recommended pressures." is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time.
When you continue the reset resumes auto-
matically.
Messages
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the
DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be
switched on.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss-
ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-
dling, such as steering and braking re-
sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited
stability. There is a risk of an accident. Do
not continue driving if the vehicle is
equipped with normal tires. Follow the in-
formation on run-flat tires and continued
driving with these tires.
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap-
pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
The system has detected a
wheel change, but no reset was
done.
No reset was performed for the
system. The system issues a
warning based on the tire infla-
tion pressures stored during the
last reset.
Inflation was not carried out ac-
cording to specifications.
The tire inflation pressure has
fallen below the level of the last
reset.
Measure
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Reset the system.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated
in the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Seite 172
CONTROLS Safety
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure
loss.
No reset was performed for the
system. The system issues a
warning based on the tire infla-
tion pressures stored during the
last reset.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and drive moder-
ately. Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas
station, check and correct the tire infla-
tion pressure in all four tires, if neces-
sary.
3. Reset the system.
If there is a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated
in the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire
appears in a Check Control message on the
Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major
loss in tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the
system. The system issues a
warning based on the tire infla-
tion pressures stored during the
last reset.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
neuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 272, are la-
beled with a circular symbol containing
the letters RSC marked on the tire's
sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pres-
sure in all four tires, for instance using
the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-
tor may not have been reset. In this
case, perform the reset.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. In this
case, initialize the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is
not possible, please contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire
kit or by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire
kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.
In this case, have the electronics checked
and replaced at the next opportunity.
Seite 173
Safety CONTROLS
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Run-flat tires
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure;
for instance, your lane stability when
braking is reduced, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged
tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
neuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-
tor may not have been reset. In this
case, perform the reset.
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road
conditions, external temperature. The driv-
ing range may be less but may also be more
if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average
weight and used under favorable conditions,
the distance for which it may be safe to
drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will
handle differently, potentially leading to
conditions such as the following:
– Greater likelihood of swerving off
course.
– Longer braking distances.
– Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt
steering maneuvers or driving over obsta-
cles, for instance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
System limits
Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase
the tire's temperature, thus increasing the
tire inflation pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when
the tire temperature falls again.
These circumstances may cause a warning
when temperatures fall very sharply.
Sudden tire pressure loss
The system cannot indicate sudden serious
tire damage caused by external circumstan-
ces.
Seite 174
CONTROLS Safety
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Failure to perform a reset
The system does not function properly if a
reset has not been carried out, for instance
a flat tire is reported though tire inflation
pressures are correct.
Malfunction
The yellow warning light flashes and
is then illuminated continuously. A
Check Control message is displayed.
It may not be possible to identify tire pres-
sure losses.
Examples and recommendations in the fol-
lowing situations:
– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics
is mounted: have it checked by a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop as needed.
– Malfunction: have system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
– The system was unable to complete the
reset. Perform a system reset again.
– Interference caused by systems or devi-
ces with the same radio frequency: after
leaving the area of the interference, the
system automatically becomes active
again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-
bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.) As an added safety
feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han-
dling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction indica-
tor to indicate when the system is not oper-
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi-
cator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a mal-
function, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain contin-
uously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-
functions may occur for a variety of rea-
sons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-
tioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en-
sure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
Seite 175
Safety CONTROLS
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure
loss on the basis of rotation speed differen-
ces between the individual wheels while
driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss,
the diameter and therefore the rotational
speed of the corresponding wheel changes.
The difference will be detected and reported
as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual in-
flation pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for
the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a
loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:
– After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini-
tialization was performed with the cor-
rect tire inflation pressure.
– After the tire inflation pressure was ad-
justed to a new value, an initialization
was performed.
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor
can be displayed, for instance whether the
RPA is active.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the
following situations:
– After the tire inflation pressure has
been adjusted.
– After a tire or wheel replacement.
Performing initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation
pressures serve as reference values in order
to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started
by confirming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving
with snow chains.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driv-
ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues
when driving resumes.
Messages
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic
Stability Control is switched on, if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss-
ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-
dling, such as steering and braking re-
sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited
stability. There is a risk of an accident. Do
not continue driving if the vehicle is
equipped with normal tires. Follow the in-
Seite 176
CONTROLS Safety
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
formation on run-flat tires and continued
driving with these tires.
Indication of a flat tire
A yellow warning light is illuminated
in the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major
loss in tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
neuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 272, are la-
beled with a circular symbol containing
the letters RSC marked on the tire's
sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pres-
sure in all four tires, for instance using
the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-
tor may not have been reset. In this
case, perform the reset.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. In this
case, initialize the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is
not possible, please contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire
kit or by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire
kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.
In this case, have the electronics checked
and replaced at the next opportunity.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure;
for instance, your lane stability when
braking is reduced, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged
tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
neuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. In this
case, initialize the system.
Seite 177
Safety CONTROLS
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road
conditions, external temperature. The driv-
ing range may be less but may also be more
if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average
weight and used under favorable conditions,
the distance for which it may be safe to
drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will
handle differently, potentially leading to
conditions such as the following:
– Greater likelihood of swerving off
course.
– Longer braking distances.
– Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt
steering maneuvers or driving over obsta-
cles, for instance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
System limits
The system could be delayed or malfunction
in the following situations:
– A natural, even tire inflation pressure
loss in all four tires will not be recog-
nized. Therefore, check the tire inflation
pressure regularly.
– Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external circumstances cannot be recog-
nized in advance.
– When the system has not been initial-
ized.
– When driving on a snowy or slippery
road surface.
– Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drift-
ing).
– When driving with snow chains.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation
of the driver assistance system.
The intelligent safety systems can help pre-
vent an imminent collision.
– Approach control warning with City
light braking function, refer to
page 179.
– Person warning with City light braking
function, refer to page 182.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv-
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traf-
fic closely and actively intervene where
appropriate.
Seite 178
CONTROLS Safety
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
ment. Due to its limits, the system might
not output warnings or reactions or these
might be output late, incorrectly, or with-
out justification. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are auto-
matically active after every departure. Some
Intelligent Safety systems activate accord-
ing to the last setting.
Press button briefly:
– The menu for the intelligent
safety system is displayed. The
systems are individually
switched off according to their
respective settings.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings
are stored for the driver profile currently in
use.
Press button again:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on.
– The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched off.
– The LED goes out.
Approach control warning
with city light braking func-
tion
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If
an accident cannot be prevented, the sys-
tem will help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an im-
minent collision and activates brakes inde-
pendently, if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
A camera at the base of the interior mirror
controls the system.
The approach control warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehi-
cle intentionally, the approach control warn-
ing and braking are delayed in order to
avoid false system reactions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an immi-
nent danger of collision at speeds from ap-
Seite 179
Safety CONTROLS
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may
vary with the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up
to 35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are
taken into account.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv-
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traf-
fic closely and actively intervene where
appropriate.
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
ment. Due to its limits, the system might
not output warnings or reactions or these
might be output late, incorrectly, or with-
out justification. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior
mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior
mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after ev-
ery driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
– The menu for the intelligent
safety system is displayed. The
systems are individually
Seite 180
CONTROLS Safety
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
switched off according to their
respective settings.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings
are stored for the driver profile currently in
use.
Press button again:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on.
– The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched off.
– The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via the Central
Information Display (CID).
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
5. Select the desired setting.
The selected warning time is stored for the
driver profile currently in use.
Warning with braking function
Display
A warning symbol appears in the instru-
ment cluster and in the Head-up Display if a
collision with a detected vehicle is immi-
nent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarn-
ing.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute
warning.
Brake and make an evasive ma-
neuver, if necessary.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for instance when
there is the impending danger of a collision
or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too
small.
The driver must intervene actively when
there is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning is displayed in case of the
imminent danger of a collision when the ve-
hicle approaches another object at a high
differential speed.
The driver must intervene actively when
there is an acute warning. If necessary, the
driver is assisted by a minor automatic
braking intervention in a possible risk of
collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered with-
out previous forewarning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to react.
During a warning, the maximum braking
force is used. Prerequisite for the brake
booster is sufficiently quick and sufficiently
hard stepping on the brake pedal. If there is
a risk of collision, the system may assist
with braking.When the vehicle is traveling
at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a
complete stop.
Seite 181
Safety CONTROLS
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
The braking intervention occurs only if ve-
hicle stability has not been restricted,
for instance by deactivating the DSC Dy-
namic Stability Control.
The driver may cancel the braking interven-
tion by stepping on the accelerator pedal or
by actively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow
the limitations of the detection range and
functional restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late, in-
correctly, or without justification due to
the system limits. There is a risk of acci-
dents or risk of damage to property. Follow
the information regarding the system lim-
its and actively intervene if needed.
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de-
tected:
– Slow moving vehicles when you ap-
proach them at high speed.
– Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front
of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
– Vehicles with an unusual rear appear-
ance.
– Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in
the following situations:
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall.
– In tight curves.
– If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
– If the driving stability control systems
are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
– Up to 10 seconds after the start of the
engine via the Start/Stop button.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery.
– If there are constant blinding effects be-
cause of oncoming light, for instance
from the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings
are, the more warnings are displayed.
Therefore, there may also be an excess of
premature or unjustified warnings and reac-
tions.
Person warning with City
light braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system
will issue a warning if there is imminent
risk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup-
port this with a light braking function.
The camera at the base of the interior mir-
ror controls the system.
General information
With sufficient brightness, the system
warns about possible collision danger with
pedestrians starting at approx.
6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h
and assists with braking before a collision.
Seite 182
CONTROLS Safety
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
The system reacts to people who are within
the detection range of the system.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is
divided into two areas:
– Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of
the vehicle.
– Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo-
cated within the central area. A warning is
issued about pedestrians who are located
within the extended area only if they are
moving in the direction of the central area.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv-
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traf-
fic closely and actively intervene where
appropriate.
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
ment. Due to its limits, the system might
not output warnings or reactions or these
might be output late, incorrectly, or with-
out justification. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior
mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior
mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after ev-
ery driving off.
Seite 183
Safety CONTROLS
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
– The menu for the intelligent
safety system is displayed. The
systems are individually
switched off according to their
respective settings.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings
are stored for the driver profile currently in
use.
Press button again:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on.
– The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched off.
– The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this
way is imminent, a warning symbol appears
on the instrument cluster and in the Head-
up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a
signal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or
make an evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to react.
During a warning, the maximum braking
force is used. Prerequisite for the brake
booster is sufficiently quick and sufficiently
hard stepping on the brake pedal. If there is
a risk of collision, the system may assist
with braking.When the vehicle is traveling
at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a
complete stop.
The braking intervention occurs only if ve-
hicle stability has not been restricted,
for instance by deactivating the DSC Dy-
namic Stability Control.
The driver may cancel the braking interven-
tion by stepping on the accelerator pedal or
by actively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow
the limitations of the detection range and
functional restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late, in-
correctly, or without justification due to
the system limits. There is a risk of acci-
dents or risk of damage to property. Follow
the information regarding the system lim-
its and actively intervene if needed.
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim-
ited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be
issued late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de-
tected:
– Partially covered pedestrians.
– Pedestrians that are not detected as
such because of the viewing angle or
contour.
– Pedestrians outside of the detection
range.
Seite 184
CONTROLS Safety
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or
may not be available in the following situa-
tions:
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall.
– In tight curves.
– If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
– If the driving stability control systems
are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
– Up to 10 seconds after the start of the
engine via the Start/Stop button.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery.
– If there are constant blinding effects be-
cause of oncoming light, for instance
from the sun low in the sky.
– When it is dark outside.
Brake force display
Concept
Additional brake lights indicate emergency
braking to the traffic behind. This can re-
duce the risk of a rear-end collision.
General information
– During normal brake application, the
brake lights light up.
– During heavy brake application, the
flashers additionally light up.
Alertness assistant
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness
or fatigue of the driver during long, monoto-
nous trips, for instance on highways. In this
situation, it is recommended that the driver
takes a break.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing one's physical state. An increasing
lack of alertness or fatigue may not be de-
tected or not be detected in time. There is
a risk of an accident. Make sure that the
driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions.
Function
The system is switched on each time the en-
gine is started and cannot be switched off.
Seite 185
Safety CONTROLS
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
After travel has begun, the system monitors
certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so
that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be
detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria
into account:
– Personal driving style, for instance
steering behavior.
– Driving conditions, for instance length
of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h,
the system is active and can display a rec-
ommendation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,
a message is displayed in the Control Dis-
play with the recommendation to take a
break.
A recommendation to take a break is dis-
played only once during an uninterrupted
trip.
After a break, another recommendation to
take a break cannot be displayed until after
approximately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the follow-
ing situations, for instance and will either
output an incorrect warning or no warning
at all:
– When the clock is set incorrectly.
– When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
– With a sporty driving style, such as dur-
ing rapid acceleration or when corner-
ing fast.
– In active driving situations, such as
when changing lanes frequently.
– When the road surface is poor.
– In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes af-
ter parking the vehicle, for instance in the
case of a break during longer trips on high-
ways.
PostCrash – iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the vehicle to a halt automatically
without intervention by the driver in cer-
tain situations. This can reduce the risk of a
further collision and the consequences
thereof.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically. Secure the vehicle against
rolling.
Harder vehicle braking
It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in
certain situations to a halt quicker.
To do this, for a short time the braking pres-
sure applied when stepping on the brake
pedal must be higher than the braking pres-
sure achieved by the automatic braking
function. This interrupts automatic braking.
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic
braking in certain situations, for instance
for an evasive maneuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:
– By pressing the brake pedal.
– By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Seite 186
CONTROLS Safety
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle maintains its steering power
even during full brake applications, thus in-
creasing active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the
engine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys-
tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak-
ing capability to the furthest possible ex-
tent. It reduces the braking distance to a
minimum during emergency stop. This sys-
tem utilizes all of the capabilities provided
by the Antilock Brake System ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake
pedal for the duration of the emergency
stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps
to keep the vehicle on a steady course by
reducing engine speed and by applying
brakes to the individual wheels.
A change in the drive type, refer to page 70,
can be made to improve traction.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving
conditions, for instance:
– Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer-
ing.
– Loss of traction of the front wheels,
which can lead to understeering.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 188, is a version of the DSC where for-
ward momentum is optimized.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the
limits of the system, it cannot independ-
ently react to all traffic situations. There is
a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style
to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Seite 187
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
WARNING
When driving with a roof load, for in-
stance with roof-mounted luggage rack,
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher,
which increases the risk of the vehicle tip-
ping in critical driving situations. There is
a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
property. Do not deactivate DSC Dynamic
Stability Control when driving with roof
load.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light flashes: DSC con-
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
General information
Depending on the operating state of the
high-voltage system, the drive of the vehicle
automatically switches between front-
wheel, rear-wheel and four-wheel drive. If
DSC is deactivated, this may result in auto-
matic change of the drive type for unstable
driving situations.
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability
is reduced during acceleration and when
driving in curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not
longer than approx. 10 seconds, un-
til the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up in the instrument cluster and dis-
plays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator light lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
Automatic activation
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activa-
tion occurs in the following situations:
– The vehicle has a flat tire.
– When activating cruise control in
TRACTION or DSC OFF mode.
DTC Dynamic Traction Con-
trol
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control where forward momentum is op-
timized.
The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions, for instance unp-
lowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces,
but with somewhat limited vehicle stability.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has
maximum traction. Driving stability is lim-
ited during acceleration and when driving
in curves.
Drive carefully.
You may find it useful to briefly activate
DTC under the following special circum-
stances:
Seite 188
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
– When driving off from deep snow or
loose ground.
– When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC
Dynamic Traction Control
Activating DTC
Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the in-
strument cluster and the indicator light for
DSC OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica-
tor light go out.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of
the vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, wheels are
braked individually when a sporty driving
style is used.
Due to the variable drive configuration, this
intervention can be done either on the front
axle, the rear axle or on both axles simulta-
neously.
MINI Driving Modes switch
Concept
The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to
fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.
Choose between three different programs.
Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch
will activate the particular program.
Operating the programs
MINI Driving Modes switch Program
SPORT
MID
GREEN
MID
MID provides balanced tuning.
With each starting operation, MID is acti-
vated using the Start/Stop button.
GREEN
Concept
GREEN, refer to page 247, provides consis-
tent tuning to maximize range.
Activating GREEN
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch
downward until GREEN is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Configuring GREEN
Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1. Activate GREEN.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Configure the program.
This configuration is retrieved when
GREEN is activated.
Via the Central Information Display (CID)
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
Seite 189
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
4. "Configure GREEN"
5. Select the desired setting.
This configuration is retrieved when
GREEN is activated.
SPORT
Concept
Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain
for greater driving agility.
Activating SPORT
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up-
ward until SPORT is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
Configuring driving program
Settings can be made for the following driv-
ing programs in Driving mode:
– GREEN, refer to page 189.
Displays
Program selection
Pressing the MINI Driving
Modes switch displays a list of
programs, which can be se-
lected.
Selected program
The instrument cluster dis-
plays the selected program.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill
grades. The parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off
assistant
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off
without delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle
is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Servotronic
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power
steering function.
The system provides the steering force with
more support at low speeds than at higher
ones. This makes it easier to park, for in-
stance, and makes steering more direct
when driving at faster speeds.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts ac-
cording to the driving program, so that a di-
rect, sporty feel or a comfortable steering
response is conveyed.
Seite 190
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Camera-based cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a
distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted
using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed on
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle ac-
celerates or brakes automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys-
tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle so
that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is
maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as
the given situation allows.
The distance can be adjusted in several
steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the
respective speed.
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic
transmissions: if the vehicle ahead of you
brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive
again shortly thereafter, the system is able
to detect this within the given system lim-
its.
General information
A camera on the interior mirror is used to
detect vehicles driving ahead.
Depending on the driving settings, the fea-
tures of the cruise control can change in
certain areas.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the
limits of the system, it cannot independ-
ently react to all traffic situations. There is
a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style
to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad-
justed or called up by mistake. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the desired
speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traf-
fic closely and actively intervene where
appropriate.
WARNING
Risk of accident due to too high speed dif-
ferences to other vehicles, for instance in
the following situations:
– When fast approaching a slowly mov-
ing vehicle.
– Vehicle suddenly swerving into own
lane.
– When fast approaching standing ve-
hicles.
Seite 191
Driving comfort CONTROLS
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Watch traffic closely and actively inter-
vene where appropriate.
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
lowing:
– Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
rection of the curb.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
stance with a wheel chock.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 193.
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 193.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 193.
Continue cruise control with the
last setting, refer to page 194.
Reduce distance, refer to
page 194.
Increase distance, refer to
page 194.
Button Function
Increase speed, refer to
page 193.
Reduce speed, refer to page 193.
Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's
series, optional features and country speci-
fications.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior
mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior
mirror clean and clear.
Functional requirements
Speed range
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The system is functional at speeds begin-
ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic
transmissions: the system can also be acti-
vated while the vehicle is stationary.
The max. speed that can be set is
85 mph/140 km/h.
Seite 192
CONTROLS Driving comfort
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
Display in the instrument cluster
lights up.
Display in the instrument cluster
lights up. The current speed is
adopted as desired speed and dis-
played with symbol.
Cruise control is active and maintains the
set speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched
on, if necessary.
Switching off
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic
transmissions: when switching off while
stationary, depress the brake pedal simulta-
neously.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired
speed is deleted.
Interrupting manually
Press button on the steering wheel.
With the Stop&Go function for Step-
tronic transmissions: when interrupting
while stationary, depress the brake pedal si-
multaneously.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in
the following situations:
– When the driver applies the brakes.
– If selector lever position N is set.
– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-
vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control
is deactivated.
– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-
venes.
– If the detection range of the camera is
impaired, for instance by soiling, heavy
precipitation or glare effects from the
sun.
– With the Stop&Go function for Step-
tronic transmissions: following a sta-
tionary period of approx. 3 seconds, af-
ter the vehicle was braked to a stop by
the system.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press or button in the interrupted
state.
When the system is switched on, the cur-
rent speed is maintained and stored as the
desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the
symbol.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
switched on, if necessary.
The speed can also be stored as follows:
Press button.
Changing the speed
or button: press until the desired
speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when
the road is clear.
– or button: each time it is pressed
to the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
Seite 193
Driving comfort CONTROLS
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– or button: each time it is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
or button: hold down to repeat the
action.
Adjusting distance
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to
the system limits, braking can be late.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of dam-
age to property. Be aware to the traffic sit-
uation at all times. Adjust the distance to
the traffic and weather conditions and
maintain the prescribed safety distance,
possibly by braking.
Reduce distance
Press button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The set distance is briefly displayed
in the left part of the instrument
cluster.
Increase distance
Press button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The set distance is briefly displayed
in the left part of the instrument
cluster.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be contin-
ued by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between cur-
rent speed and stored speed is not too large
before calling up the stored speed. Other-
wise, unintentional braking or accelerating
may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed
value is deleted and cannot be called up
again:
– When the system is switched off.
– When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up stored speed and distance
Press button with the system inter-
rupted. Cruise control is continued
with the stored values. The selected
distance is briefly displayed in the Info Dis-
play.
Switching distance control on/off
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not react to traffic driv-
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains
the stored speed. There is a risk of acci-
dents or risk of damage to property. Adjust
the desired speed to the traffic conditions
and brake as needed.
Switching distance control off
Distance control can be switched off and on
when driving with cruise control activated.
Press and hold this button.
Seite 194
CONTROLS Driving comfort
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Or:
Press and hold this button.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up.
To switch distance control back on, press
one of the two buttons again briefly.
After changing over distance control, a
Check Control message is displayed.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed and stored speed
In addition to the indicator light, the
desired speed is displayed in the Info
Display.
– Display lights up green: system is active,
the display indicates the desired speed.
– Display lights up orange: system is in-
terrupted, the display indicates the
stored speed.
– No display: system is switched off.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that
the conditions necessary for operation are
not currently fulfilled.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance from the vehicle driving
ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand
portion of the Info Display.
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance display
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set automatically af-
ter the system is switched on.
Detected vehicle
Symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
With the Stop&Go function for Step-
tronic transmissions:
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle
has driven away.
ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti-
vate ACC as follows:
– By briefly pressing the accelerator
pedal.
– By pressing the RES CNCL button.
– By pressing the or button.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for
the system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Symbol flashes red and a signal
sounds:
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
ver, if necessary.
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is temporarily sup-
pressed because the accelerator
Seite 195
Driving comfort CONTROLS
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not de-
tected.
Distance control is temporarily sup-
pressed because the accelerator
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was
detected.
Displays in the Head-up Display
The information from Active Cruise Control
can also be displayed in the Head-up Dis-
play.
System limits
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and
the automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might
not be detected.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the fol-
lowing situations:
– For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly
slow-moving road users.
– For red traffic lights.
– For cross traffic.
– For oncoming traffic.
– Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonwork-
ing lighting at night.
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not de-
tected until it is completely within the same
lane as your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not
be able to automatically restore the selected
distance. It may not be possible to restore
the selected distance in certain situations,
including if you are driving significantly
faster than vehicles driving ahead of you,
for instance when rapidly approaching a
truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you
is reliably detected, the system requests
that the driver intervene by braking and
carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.
With the Stop&Go function for
Steptronic transmissions: driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
off automatically; for example:
– On steep uphill grades.
– From bumps in the road.
In these cases, press on the accelerator
pedal.
Seite 196
CONTROLS Driving comfort
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve,
the speed is reduced slightly, although
curves cannot be anticipated in advance.
Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropri-
ate speed.
The system has a limited detection range.
Situations can arise in tight curves where a
vehicle driving ahead will not be detected
or will be detected very late.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due
to the bend of the curve. If the system de-
celerates you may compensate it by briefly
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator
pedal the system is reactivated and controls
speed independently.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under
unfavorable weather or light conditions:
– Poorer vehicle recognition.
– Short-term interruptions for vehicles
that are already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light
conditions:
– Wet conditions.
– Snowfall.
– Slush.
– Fog.
– Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current
traffic situation. If necessary, intervene ac-
tively, for instance by braking, steering or
evading.
Engine power
The desired speed may not be maintained
on uphill grades if engine power is insuffi-
cient.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails or was automatically deacti-
vated.
The system may not be fully functional in
the following situations:
– When an object was not correctly de-
tected.
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall.
– In tight curves.
– If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
– When driving toward bright lights.
– Up to 20 seconds after the start of the
engine, via the Start/Stop button.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery.
Seite 197
Driving comfort CONTROLS
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be
adjusted using the buttons on the steering
wheel. The system maintains the desired
speed. The system accelerates and brakes
automatically as needed.
General information
The system is functional at speeds begin-
ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Depending on the driving settings, the fea-
tures of the cruise control can change in
certain areas.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the
limits of the system, it cannot independ-
ently react to all traffic situations. There is
a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style
to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in-
creased risk of accidents in the following
situations, for instance:
– On winding roads.
– In heavy traffic.
– On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or
wet conditions, or on a loose road
surface.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of dam-
age to property. Only use the system if
driving at constant speed is possible.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 198.
Store speed, refer to page 199.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 198.
Continue cruise control with the
last setting, refer to page 199.
Increase speed, refer to
page 199.
Reduce speed, refer to page 199.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up.
The current speed is adopted as the
desired speed and is displayed with
the symbol in the instrument cluster.
Cruise control is active and maintains the
set speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched
on, if necessary.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
Seite 198
CONTROLS Driving comfort
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
The displays go out. The stored desired
speed is deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on
the steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in
the following situations:
– When the driver applies the brakes.
– If selector lever position N is set.
– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-
vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control
is deactivated.
– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-
venes.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press or button in the interrupted
state.
When the system is switched on, the cur-
rent speed is maintained and stored as the
desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched
on, if necessary.
The speed can also be stored as follows:
Press button.
Changing the speed
or button: press until the desired
speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when
the road is clear.
– or button: each time it is pressed
to the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
– or button: each time it is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
– or button: pressing it to the re-
sistance point and holding it accelerates
or decelerates the vehicle without re-
quiring pressure on the accelerator
pedal. After the button is released, the
vehicle maintains its final speed. Press-
ing the switch beyond the resistance
point causes the vehicle to accelerate
more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be contin-
ued by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between cur-
rent speed and stored speed is not too large
before calling up the stored speed. Other-
wise, unintentional braking or accelerating
may occur.
Calling up stored speed
Press button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached again and main-
tained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator light
Depending on how the vehicle is
equipped, the indicator light in the
instrument cluster indicates whether
the system is switched on.
Seite 199
Driving comfort CONTROLS
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Desired speed and stored speed
The desired speed is displayed to-
gether with the symbol.
– Display lights up green: system is
active, the display indicates the
desired speed.
– Display lights up orange: system is in-
terrupted, the display indicates the
stored speed.
– No display: system is switched off.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that
the conditions necessary for operation are
not currently fulfilled.
System limits
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained down-
hill, but may not be maintained on uphill
grades if engine power is insufficient.
PDC Park Distance Control
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. The system
detects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve-
hicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in
front of the vehicle are detected too. Ob-
jects that you are approaching slowly are in-
dicated by signal tones and a visual display.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the
distances are located in the bumpers.
The maneuvering range, depending on ob-
stacles and environmental conditions, is ap-
prox. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the fol-
lowing situations:
– By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm
from the object.
– By the rear middle sensors at ap-
prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.
– When a collision is imminent.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic situation. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf-
fic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle
surroundings closely and actively inter-
vene where appropriate.
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis-
tance Control is activated, the warning can
be delayed due to physical circumstances.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Avoid approaching an object
too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC
Park Distance Control is not yet active.
Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle
Park assistance button
Seite 200
CONTROLS Driving comfort
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the
PDC, for instance in the bump-
ers.
Functional requirements
Ensure full functionality:
– Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers, bicycle racks.
– Keep the sensors clean and unob-
structed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
– If selector lever position R is engaged
when the engine is running.
The rearview camera also switches on.
– With front PDC: when obstacles are de-
tected behind or in front of the vehicle
by PDC and the speed is slower than ap-
prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
With front PDC: automatic activation on ob-
stacle detection can be switched off. Via the
Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending
on the vehicle equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
The setting is stored for the driver pro-
file currently used.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain
driving distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press park assistance button.
– On: the LED lights up.
– Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed if
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing
the park assistance button.
WARNING
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermit-
tent sound indicates the position of the ob-
ject. E.g., if an object is detected to the left
rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds
from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less
than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous
tone is sounded.
With front PDC: if objects are simultane-
ously located both in front of and behind
the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig-
nal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off, when selec-
tor lever position P is engaged on vehicles
with Steptronic transmission.
Seite 201
Driving comfort CONTROLS
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to
the entertainment volume can be adjusted.
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
5. "PDC"
6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Objects
that are farther away are already displayed
on the Control Display before a signal
sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in
colors: red, green and yellow.
When the image of the rearview camera is
displayed, the switch can be made to PDC:
"Rear view camera"
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late, in-
correctly, or without justification due to
the system limits. There is a risk of acci-
dents or risk of damage to property. Follow
the information regarding the system lim-
its and actively intervene if needed.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function
under the following circumstances:
– For small children and animals.
– For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance coats.
– With external interference of the ultra-
sound, for instance from passing vehi-
cles or loud machines.
– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-
aged or out of position.
– If cargo protrudes.
– Under certain weather conditions such
as high relative humidity, wet condi-
tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong
wind.
– With tow bars and trailer couplings of
other vehicles.
– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
– With moving objects.
– With elevated, protruding objects such
as ledges or cargo.
– With objects with corners and sharp
edges.
– With objects with a fine surface struc-
ture such as fences.
– For objects with porous surfaces.
– Low objects already displayed, for in-
stance curbs, can move into the blind
area of the sensors before or after a con-
tinuous tone sounds.
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the
following conditions even though there is
no obstacle within the detection range:
– In heavy rain.
– When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
– When sensors are covered in snow.
Seite 202
CONTROLS Driving comfort
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– On rough road surfaces.
– On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
– In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for instance in under-
ground garages.
– In automatic vehicle washes.
– Due to heavy exhaust.
– Due to other ultrasound sources, for in-
stance sweeping machines, high pres-
sure steam cleaners or neon lights.
The malfunction is signaled by a contin-
uous tone alternating between the front
and rear speakers. As soon as the mal-
function due to other ultrasound sources
is no longer present, the system is again
fully functional.
With front PDC: to reduce false alarms,
switch off automatic PDC activation on ob-
stacle detection, for instance in vehicle
washes; see Switching on/off.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Red symbol is displayed, and the
range of the sensors is dimmed on
the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by
a dealer’s service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The
area behind the vehicle is shown on the
Control Display.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic situation. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf-
fic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle
surroundings closely and actively inter-
vene where appropriate.
Overview
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of
the tailgate.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
If necessary, clean the camera lens.
Seite 203
Driving comfort CONTROLS
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if
selector lever position R is engaged when
the engine is running.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain
driving distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
– On: the LED lights up.
– Off: the LED goes out.
The parking assistance functions are shown
on the Control Display.
Switching the view via the Central
Information Display (CID)
If the rearview camera view is not dis-
played, change the view via the Central In-
formation Display (CID):
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
– The rearview camera is switched on.
– The tailgate is fully closed.
– Keep the recording range of the camera
clear.
Protruding cargo or carrier systems and
trailers that are not connected to a
trailer power socket can lead to malfunc-
tions.
Activating assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be
active at the same time.
– Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
– Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Obstacles are marked, depending on the
vehicle equipment.
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the
image of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the
space required when parking and maneu-
vering on level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steer-
ing angle and are continuously adjusted to
the steering wheel movements.
Seite 204
CONTROLS Driving comfort
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can be superimposed
on the image of the rearview camera.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed af-
ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer-
tain angle.
Obstacle marking
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obsta-
cle markings can be faded into the image of
the rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark-
ings match the markings of the PDC Park
Distance Control.
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning
radius lines lead to within the limits of
the parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point
where the pathway line covers the cor-
responding turning radius line.
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is reached and press the Controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is reached and press the Controller.
Seite 205
Driving comfort CONTROLS
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles or high, protruding ob-
jects such as ledges may not be recognized
by the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some
assistance functions also consider data from
the PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance
Control chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Dis-
play may be closer than they appear. There-
fore, do not estimate the distance from the
objects on the display.
Parking assistant
Concept
This system assists the driver in parking
parallel to the road.
General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into
three steps:
– Switching on and activating.
– Parking space search.
– Parking.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best
possible parking line and takes control of
steering during the parking procedure.
System status and instructions on required
actions are displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the
limits of the system, it cannot independ-
ently react to all traffic situations. There is
a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style
to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
NOTICE
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle
over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Watch traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate.
The safety information of the PDC Park Dis-
tance Control applies in addition.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Seite 206
CONTROLS Driving comfort
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors for measuring park-
ing spaces are located on the wheel hous-
ing.
Functional requirements
Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality:
– Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers.
– Keep the sensors clean and unob-
structed.
For measuring parking spaces
– Maximum speed while driving forward
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.
– Maximum distance to row of parked ve-
hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
– Gaps behind an object that has a min.
length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
– Gap between two objects with a mini-
mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
– Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
3.3 ft/1.0 m.
– Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking
– Doors and tailgate are closed.
– The parking brake is released.
– When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn sig-
nal must be switched on.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Press park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space
search is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automati-
cally.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space
search is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not availa-
ble.
White: the system is available
but not activated.
The system is activated.
Seite 207
Driving comfort CONTROLS
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Parking space search and system
status
– Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park-
ing assistant is activated and the park-
ing space search is active.
– Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to
the vehicle symbol. When the parking
assistant is active, suitable parking
spaces are highlighted.
– The parking procedure is
active. Steering control
has been taken over by
system.
– Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is
deactivated. When the system is deacti-
vated, the displays on the Control Dis-
play are shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
Parking
1. Press the park assistance button or
shift into reverse gear to switch on the
parking assistant, refer to page 207. Ac-
tivate the parking assistant, if needed.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a
speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h
and at a distance of maximum
5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search
and possible parking spaces are dis-
played on the display, refer to page 207.
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
The best possible parking position will
come after gear change on the station-
ary vehicle - wait for the automatic
steering wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is in-
dicated on the display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at
any time:
– Press park assistance button.
– "Parking Assistant"
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in
the following situations:
– If the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
– If a gear is selected that does not match
the instruction on the display.
– If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
– Possibly on snow-covered or slippery
road surfaces.
– If a maximum number of parking at-
tempts or the time taken for parking is
exceeded.
– If the PDC Park Distance Control dis-
plays clearances that are too small.
– When switching into other functions of
the radio.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Seite 208
CONTROLS Driving comfort
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Resuming
An interrupted parking procedure can be
continued, if needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 207, and follow the instructions on the
display.
Switching off
The system can be switched off as follows:
– Press park assistance button.
– Switching off the ignition.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late, in-
correctly, or without justification due to
the system limits. There is a risk of acci-
dents or risk of damage to property. Follow
the information regarding the system lim-
its and actively intervene if needed.
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis-
tance in the following situations:
– In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in
the following situations:
– On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
– On slippery ground.
– With accumulations of leaves/snow in
the parking space.
– With a mounted emergency wheel.
– With ditches or edges, for instance an
edge of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function
under the following circumstances:
– For small children and animals.
– For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance coats.
– With external interference of the ultra-
sound, for instance from passing vehi-
cles or loud machines.
– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-
aged or out of position.
– If cargo protrudes.
– Under certain weather conditions such
as high relative humidity, wet condi-
tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong
wind.
– With tow bars and trailer couplings of
other vehicles.
– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
– With moving objects.
– With elevated, protruding objects such
as ledges or cargo.
– With objects with corners and sharp
edges.
– With objects with a fine surface struc-
ture such as fences.
– For objects with porous surfaces.
– Low objects already displayed, for in-
stance curbs, can move into the blind
area of the sensors before or after a con-
tinuous tone sounds.
– The parking assistant may identify park-
ing spaces that are not suitable for park-
ing.
Tire size
The parking position may vary depending
on the tire size.
Seite 209
Driving comfort CONTROLS
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the sys-
tem checked by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Seite 210
CONTROLS Driving comfort
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Interior air quality
The air quality in the vehicle is improved by
the following components:
– Emission tested car's interior.
– Microfilter.
– Air conditioning system to control the
temperature, air flow and recirculated-
air mode.
Depending on the equipment specification:
– Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
– Automatic climate control.
– Parked-car ventilation.
Air conditioner
1 Air distribution settings 2 Air flow
Seite 211
Climate control CONTROLS
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
3 Temperature
4 Seat heating, right 102
5 Air conditioning
6 Recirculated-air mode
7 Rear window defroster
8 Windshield defroster
9 Seat heating, left 102
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Set any air flow.
Switching off
Turn the wheel for air flow all
the way to the left.
Temperature
Concept
The system heats or cools, depending on the
set temperature.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the de-
sired temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled
and dehumidified and, depending on the
temperature setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can be cooled via the A/C
button with the engine running and/or with
drive-ready state activated.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with air con-
ditioning switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield
may fog up briefly when the engine is
started.
The air conditioner produces condensation
water, refer to page 243, that will exit from
below the vehicle.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-
tants in the immediate environment by tem-
porarily suspending the supply of outside
air. The system then recirculates the air
flow within the vehicle.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
– LED off: outside air flows in continu-
ously.
– LED on, recirculated-air mode: the sup-
ply of outside air into the vehicle is per-
manently blocked.
To prevent window condensation, recircu-
lated-air mode switches off automatically af-
ter a certain amount of time, depending on
the external temperature.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and
the fogging of the windows increases.
Seite 212
CONTROLS Climate control
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu-
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if
needed.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be ad-
justed manually.
Operation
Turn the ring to set the de-
sired air flow.
The higher the air flow, the
more effective the heating or
cooling will be.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be
reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can
be adjusted manually.
Operation
Turn the wheel to select the
desired program or the desired
intermediate setting.
– Windows.
– Upper body region.
– Floor area.
– Windows, upper body region, and
floor area.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Make the following settings to defrost the
windows and remove condensation:
– Direct the air distribution onto the win-
dows.
– Increasing the air flow.
– Increase the temperature.
– Switch on the air conditioning if needed.
Windshield defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The front window defroster
switches off automatically after a certain
period of time.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of
time.
For permanent activation, press the button
for longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate,
press the button again.
The rear window defroster can only be acti-
vated continuously at an external tempera-
ture below approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃.
When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater
output is reduced.
Microfilter
In external and recirculated-air mode the
microfilter filters dust and pollen from the
air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle
maintenance, refer to page 292.
Seite 213
Climate control CONTROLS
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Automatic climate control
1 Temperature, left
2 Display
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity
4 AUTO program
5 Air distribution, manual
6 Display
7 Temperature, right
8 Seat heating, right 102
9 Maximum cooling
10 Air conditioning
11 Recirculated-air mode
12 Rear window defroster
13 Windshield defroster
14 Defrosting windows and removing con-
densation
15 Seat heating, left 102
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Set any air flow.
Switching off
Turn wheel for air flow to the
left until the control switches
off.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the
set temperature as quickly as possible, if
Seite 214
CONTROLS Climate control
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
necessary by using the maximum cooling or
heating power, and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the de-
sired temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between different
temperature settings. The automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to ad-
just the set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled
and dehumidified and, depending on the
temperature setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can be cooled via the A/C
button with the engine running and/or with
drive-ready state activated.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with air con-
ditioning switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield
may fog up briefly when the engine is
started.
The air conditioning is switched on auto-
matically with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 243, de-
velops and drains underneath the vehicle.
This is normal.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
maximum air flow and recirculated-air
mode.
General information
The function is available with external tem-
peratures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and
with the engine running.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body
region. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air
flow active.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the
system switched on.
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
optimum air flow and air circulation mode.
AUTO program
Concept
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or
heats the car's interior automatically.
The air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically depending on the
temperature in the car's interior and the de-
sired temperature setting including the se-
lected intensity of the air flow.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the
AUTO program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature,
AUTO intensity and outside influences, the
Seite 215
Climate control CONTROLS
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
air is directed to the windshield, side win-
dows, upper body, and into the floor area.
The following features are switched on au-
tomatically with the AUTO program:
– The air conditioning, refer to page 215.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribu-
tion.
Intensity
With the AUTO program activated, the au-
tomatic intensity control can be changed.
Turn the ring to set the de-
sired intensity from soft to in-
tensive.
The set intensity is displayed via the posi-
tion of the illuminated LED segment.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC
recognizes odors or pollutants in the out-
side air. The outside air supply is shut off
and the interior air is recirculated.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects
pollutants in the outside air and controls the
shut-off automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air con-
tinuously flows into the car's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and
the fogging of the windows increases.
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-
tants in the immediate environment by tem-
porarily suspending the supply of outside
air. The system then recirculates the air
flow within the vehicle.
Switching on/off
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
– LEDs off: outside air flows in continu-
ously.
– Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in
the outside air and shuts off automati-
cally.
– Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is
permanently blocked.
To prevent window condensation, recircu-
lated-air mode switches off automatically af-
ter a certain amount of time, depending on
the external temperature.
If windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculating mode and press the AUTO but-
ton. Make sure that air can flow to the
windshield.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be ad-
justed manually.
General information
To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO
program first.
Operation
Turn the ring to set the de-
sired air flow.
The manually adjusted air flow is displayed
via illuminated LED segments.
The air flow of the automatic climate con-
trol may be reduced automatically to save
battery power.
Seite 216
CONTROLS Climate control
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can
be adjusted manually.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
– Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
– Upper body region and floor area.
– Floor area.
– Windows and floor area.
– Windows.
– Windows and upper body region.
– Upper body region.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win-
dows.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the
system switched on.
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win-
dows.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air
flow active.
If there is window condensation, switch on
the air conditioning too.
Windshield defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The front window defroster
switches off automatically after a certain
period of time.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of
time.
For permanent activation, press the button
for longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate,
press the button again.
The rear window defroster can only be acti-
vated continuously at an external tempera-
ture below approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃.
When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater
output is reduced.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode the
microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters
dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of
the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle
maintenance, refer to page 292.
Ventilation
Setting
The air flow directions can be individually
adjusted:
– Direct ventilation:
The air flow is directly pointed onto the
person. The air flow heats or cools no-
ticeably, depending on the adjusted tem-
perature.
– Indirect ventilation:
Seite 217
Climate control CONTROLS
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
If the vents are fully or partly closed, the
air is directly routed into the car's inte-
rior.
Front ventilation
– Turn knob for continuous opening and
closing of the vents.
– Swivel the vents to alter the direction of
the vent flow, arrows.
Ventilation in the rear
– Lever for changing the air flow direc-
tion, arrow 1.
– Thumbwheel for variable opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 2.
Stationary climate control
Concept
Stationary climate control cools or heats the
car's interior prior to departure to a com-
fortable temperature.
The system automatically cools, vents, and
heats depending on the ambient and set
temperature. Snow and ice may be removed
more easily.
General information
The stationary climate control can be
switched on and off directly or via a preset
departure time:
– Direct operation, refer to page 219.
– Preselected departure times, refer to
page 219.
The air automatically exits through the
vents to the windshield, the side windows,
the upper body region and into the floor
area.
The system switches off automatically after
a certain period of time.
If stationary climate control is used during
the charging process, less air conditioning
capacity will be required while driving. This
optimizes the range.
Functional requirements
– Motor switched off and/or drive-ready
state deactivated.
– High-voltage battery sufficiently
charged or charging cable connected.
If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis-
charged, it can take some time after con-
necting the charging cable, until the sta-
tionary climate control will be
functional.
– Direct operation or departure time pre-
selected: depends on internal, external,
and set desired temperature.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and
time are set correctly.
– The ensure the starting capability of the
vehicle, the stationary climate control
may be automatically switched off, for
instance after repeated switching on:
Seite 218
CONTROLS Climate control
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
switch the drive-ready state on and off
and the system is available again.
– The vents are open to allow air to flow
out.
Switching on/off directly
Concept
The system can be switched on or off di-
rectly.
The system switches off automatically after
a certain period of time.
Via the Central Information Display
(CID):
The system can be switched on or off via
the Central Information Display (CID).
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Activate now"
Climate control at departure time
Concept
Different departure times can be adjusted to
ensure a comfortable interior temperature
in the vehicle at the time of departure.
The activation time is automatically deter-
mined based on the temperature.
The system promptly switches on before the
selected departure time.
The departure time is preselected in two
steps:
– Set departure times.
– Activate departure times.
Setting the departure time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Plan comfort climate"
6. Set the desired departure time, refer to
page 259.
Activating the departure time
If a departure time is to influence the
switching on of the stationary climate con-
trol, the respective departure time must be
activated first.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Plan comfort climate"
6. "Precondition for departure"
Activate the desired departure time.
The symbol on the automatic climate
control lights up when the departure time is
activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate
control flashes when the stationary climate
control has been switched on.
Seite 219
Climate control CONTROLS
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Integrated Universal Remote
Control
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func-
tions of remote-controlled systems, such as
garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys-
tems. The integrated Universal Remote Con-
trol replaces up to 3 different hand-held
transmitters. To operate the remote control,
the buttons on the interior mirror must be
programmed with the desired functions.
The hand-held transmitter for the particular
system is required in order to program the
remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating
remote-controlled systems, such as the ga-
rage door, using the integrated Universal
Remote Control. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. Make sure that
the area of movement of the respective
system is clear during programming and
operation. Also follow the safety informa-
tion of the hand-held transmitter.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the pack-
aging or in the owner's manual of the
system to be controlled, the system
is generally compatible with the integrated
Universal Remote Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
– A dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
– www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen-
tex Corporation.
Overview
1 LED
2 Programmable keys
3 Hand-held transmitters of the system
Seite 220
CONTROLS Interior equipment
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Programming
General information
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the LED
on the interior mirror flashes. This
erases all programming of the buttons
on the interior mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the
system to be controlled approx. 1 to
3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the but-
tons of the interior mirror. The required
distance depends on the hand-held
transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the but-
ton of the desired function on the hand-
held transmitter and the button to be
programmed on the interior mirror. The
LED on the interior mirror will begin
flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing
faster indicates that the button on the
interior mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance
between the interior mirror and the
hand-held transmitter and repeat the
step. Several more attempts at different
distances may be necessary. Wait at
least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and re-
peatedly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6. To program other functions on other
buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the in-
terior mirror buttons.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system af-
ter repeated programming, please check if
the system to be controlled features a roll-
ing code radio system.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior mir-
ror longer. If the LED on the interior mirror
starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit
constantly for 2 seconds, the system fea-
tures a rolling code radio system. Flashing
and continuous illumination of the LED will
repeat for approximately 20 seconds.
For systems with a rolling code radio sys-
tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con-
trol and the system also have to be
synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a
second person.
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re-
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the inte-
rior mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing but-
ton on the system being programmed.
You have approx. 30 seconds for the
next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on
the interior mirror for approximately
3 seconds and then release it. If neces-
sary, repeat this step up to three times
in order to finish synchronization. Once
synchronization is complete, the pro-
grammed function will be carried out.
Seite 221
Interior equipment CONTROLS
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Reprogramming individual buttons
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror but-
ton to be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-
held transmitter for the system to be
controlled approx. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to
8 cm away from the buttons of the inte-
rior mirror. The required distance de-
pends on the hand-held transmitter.
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of
the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the in-
terior mirror LED flashes more rapidly.
The LED flashing faster indicates that
the button on the interior mirror has
been programmed. The system can then
be controlled by the button on the inte-
rior mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
most 60 seconds, change the distance
and repeat the programming starting
with step 4. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary.
Wait at least 15 seconds between at-
tempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and re-
peatedly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
Operation
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating
remote-controlled systems, such as the ga-
rage door, using the integrated Universal
Remote Control. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. Make sure that
the area of movement of the respective
system is clear during programming and
operation. Also follow the safety informa-
tion of the hand-held transmitter.
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior
mirror while the engine is running or when
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down
the button within receiving range of the
system until the function is activated. The
interior mirror LED stays lit while the wire-
less signal is being transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-
mately 20 seconds until the LED on the in-
terior mirror flashes rapidly. All stored func-
tions will be deleted. The functions cannot
be deleted individually.
Digital compass
Overview
1 Control button
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.
Seite 222
CONTROLS Interior equipment
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by press-
ing the control button with a pointed object,
such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar
object. The following setting options are
displayed in succession, depending on how
long the control button is pressed:
– Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
– 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
– 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
– 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
– 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the ve-
hicle so that the compass operates correctly;
refer to World map with compass zones.
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap-
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the
set compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the
control button quickly and repeatedly
until the number of the compass zone
that corresponds with your location ap-
pears in the mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The
compass is ready for use again after approx-
imately 10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in
the event of the following:
– The wrong compass point is displayed.
– The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direc-
tion of travel.
– Not all points of the compass are dis-
played.
Seite 223
Interior equipment CONTROLS
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metal-
lic objects or overhead power lines near
the vehicle and that there is sufficient
room to drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass
zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for ap-
prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
on the display. Next, drive in a complete
circle at least once at a speed of no more
than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc-
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points
of the compass.
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right
or left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for ap-
prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the
control button again to switch between
English "E" and German "O".
Settings are stored automatically after ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
Sun visor
Glare shield
To provide protection against glare, fold the
sun visor down or pivot it to the side.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor
behind a cover.
When the cover is opened, the mirror light-
ing switches on.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Overview
The ashtray is located in one of the frontal
cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in
the center console.
Ashtray
In order to empty the ashtray, remove the
ashtray from the cup holder.
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
WARNING
Contact with the hot heating element or
the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can
cause burns. Flammable materials can ig-
nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is
held against the respective objects. There
is a risk of fire and injuries. Take hold of
the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make
sure that children do not use the cigarette
lighter and burn themselves.
Seite 224
CONTROLS Interior equipment
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property. Replace the cigarette
lighter or socket cover again after using
the socket.
Operation
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be
removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Sockets
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket
for electrical equipment when the ignition
or drive-ready state is switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-
compatible connectors.
Safety information
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of
the airbags, such as portable navigation
devices, can hinder the unfolding of the
airbag or be thrown around in the car's in-
terior during unfolding. There is a risk of
injury. Make sure that devices and cables
are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board
network can be overloaded or damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Only
connect battery chargers for the vehicle
battery to the starting aid terminals in the
engine compartment.
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property. Replace the cigarette
lighter or socket cover again after using
the socket.
In the center console
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Seite 225
Interior equipment CONTROLS
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the right side in
the cargo area.
USB interface
Concept
Mobile devices with USB port can be con-
nected to the USB interface.
General information
Follow the information regarding the con-
nection of mobile devices to the USB inter-
face in the section on USB connections, re-
fer to page 63.
In the front center console
The USB interface is located in the front of
the center console.
In the rear center console
One USB dual charge socket is located in
the rear center console.
Under the center armrest
The USB interface is located under the cen-
ter armrest.
Seite 226
CONTROLS Interior equipment
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's inte-
rior while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-
jury. Secure loose objects or devices with
a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
NOTICE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not use anti-slip
pads.
Overview
The following storage compartments are
available in the car's interior:
– Glove compartment on the front passen-
ger side.
– Storage compartment under the driver's
seat.
– Compartments in the doors.
– Storage compartment in the center arm-
rest.
– Storage compartment in front of the cup
holders.
– Clothes hooks
– Storage compartments in the cargo area.
– Storage tray in the center console.
– Pockets on the backrests of the front
seats.
Glove compartment
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment pro-
trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, for instance in
the event of an accident or during braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of
injury. Always close the glove compart-
ment immediately after using it.
Seite 227
Storage compartments CONTROLS
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment
switches on.
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Driver's seat
There is a storage compartment under the
driver's seat.
Compartments in the doors
General information
There are storage compartments in the
doors.
Safety information
WARNING
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an acci-
dent or a braking or evasive maneuver.
Broken glass can be scattered in the car's
interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Do not use any break-
able objects while driving. Only stow
breakable objects in closed storage com-
partments.
Center armrest
General information
The center armrest contains a storage com-
partment.
Opening
Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm-
rest upward, arrow 2.
Set the incline
The center armrest can be adjusted in sev-
eral tilt settings.
Cup holders
Safety information
NOTICE
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup
holder and increase the risk of injury in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Use
light-weight, unbreakable, and sealable
containers. Do not transport hot bever-
Seite 228
CONTROLS Storage compartments
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
ages. Do not force objects into the cup
holder.
Front
In the center console.
Rear
General information
The cup holder is located in the center arm-
rest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
Safety information
NOTICE
With an open cup holder, the center arm-
rest cannot be folded back up. There is a
risk of damage to property. Press back the
covers before the center armrest is folded
up.
Clothes hooks
General information
The clothes hooks are located above the
rear doors.
Safety information
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can
obstruct the view while driving. There is a
risk of an accident. When suspending
clothing articles from the clothes hooks,
ensure that they will not obstruct the driv-
er's view.
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead
to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-
erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for in-
stance clothing articles, from the clothes
hooks.
Seite 229
Storage compartments CONTROLS
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Cargo area
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Loading
Safety information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally and cause a sud-
den drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving
characteristics may be negatively im-
pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen-
ing the braking distances and changing
the steering response. There is a risk of an
accident. Pay attention to the permitted
load capacity of the tires and never exceed
the permitted gross weight.
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's inte-
rior while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-
jury. Secure loose objects or devices with
a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the car's interior, for in-
stance in the event of an accident or dur-
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. Vehi-
cle occupants can be hit and injured. There
is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects
and cargo properly.
NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo
area.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity. For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your vehi-
cle, the amount of available cargo and
Seite 230
CONTROLS Cargo area
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of lug-
gage and cargo being loaded on the ve-
hicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the availa-
ble cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight
of the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants,
the less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
– Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
– Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos-
sible, directly behind and at the bottom
of the rear passenger seat backrests.
– Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each of the outer
safety belts in the opposite buckle.
– If necessary, fold down the rear back-
rests to stow large cargo.
– Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
– Small and light cargo: secure with
ratchet straps or draw straps.
– Larger and heavy cargo: secure with
cargo straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
With storage compartment package: to se-
cure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in
the cargo area.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, retaining straps, draw straps or
cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo
area.
Cargo cover
General information
When the tailgate is opened, the cargo
cover is raised.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's inte-
rior while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and
Seite 231
Cargo area CONTROLS
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-
jury. Secure loose objects or devices with
a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
Removing
For storing bulky objects the cargo cover
can be removed.
1. Detach the left and right retaining
straps at the tailgate.
2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets
on the left and right.
Installing
1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizon-
tally into the two side brackets until it
audibly engages.
2. Attach the left and right retaining straps
at the tailgate.
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Storage compartment on the side
A storage compartment is located on the left
side.
Multi-function hook
WARNING
Improper use of the multi-function hooks
can lead to a risk of objects flying about
during braking and evasive maneuvers,
for example. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Only hang
lightweight objects, such as shopping
bags, from the multi-function hooks. Only
transport heavy luggage in the cargo area
if it has been appropriately secured.
The cargo area contains two multi-function
hooks.
Storage space under cargo
floor panel
NOTICE
The storage space under the cargo floor
panel is only suitable for soft objects. Hard
objects may result in damage to the vehi-
cle electrical system in the event of an ac-
cident. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Only stow soft objects under the
cargo floor panel.
Seite 232
CONTROLS Cargo area
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Enlarging the cargo area
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrests or by moving
the rear seat backrest into the cargo posi-
tion.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio
of 40–20–40. The side rear seat backrests
and the center section can be folded down
separately.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down
from the rear.
Safety information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the rear backrest and
the of the head restraint is clear prior to
folding down.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured cargo can be thrown into the car's
interior; for instance, in the event of an ac-
cident, braking or an evasive maneuver.
There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the rear seat backrest is locked after fold-
ing it back.
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the rear seat
backrest while driving may occur due to
unintentional unlocking of the rear seat
backrests by the straps. There is a risk of
injury. Do not fasten any objects to the
straps for unlocking the rear backrests.
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect
seat adjustment or improper installation of
the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the child re-
straint system fits securely against the
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head
restraints or remove them.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is
clear when moving the head restraint.
Folding down the rear seat
backrest from the rear
Pull the strap. The rear seat backrest folds
forward.
Seite 233
Cargo area CONTROLS
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Cargo position
Concept
The rear seat backrests can be moved into
an upright loading position individually. An
adjustment in several tilt stages is possible
as needed.
Settings
1. Pull the strap.
2. Set the loading position of the rear seat
backrest as required.
3. Engage the rear seat backrest.
Folding back the backrest
1. Pull the strap.
2. Return the rear seat backrest to the up-
right seating position and engage it.
Variable cargo area floor
Concept
With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo
area can be configured corresponding to
transport requirements.
General information
Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer
to page 230.
Removing the cargo floor panel
1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor
panel upward.
2. Grasp the cargo floor panel at the rear
and fold it upward.
3. Pull the cargo floor panel backward from
the brackets.
Inserting the cargo floor panel
1. Push the cargo area floor into the sup-
ports at a shallow angle. The cargo area
floor must engage noticeably.
Seite 234
CONTROLS Cargo area
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
2. Fold the cargo area floor over down-
ward.
MINI Picnic Bench
Concept
The MINI Picnic Bench provides a comfort-
able seating surface on the loading lip of the
vehicle.
General information
Only use the MINI Picnic Bench while the
vehicle is parked and with the tailgate open.
When the MINI Picnic Bench is not in use,
fold it together to prevent soiling and dam-
age.
In vehicles with a no-touch opening and
closing tailgate:
If the remote control is in the sensor area,
the tailgate can be opened or closed inad-
vertently by an unconscious or alleged rec-
ognized foot movement.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the
vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tail-
gate is clear during opening and closing.
Overview
The MINI Picnic Bench is located on the un-
derside of the cargo area floor.
Mounting
1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor
panel upward.
2. Place the MINI Picnic Bench on the
front part of the cargo floor panel and at-
tach it to the rear part of the cargo floor
panel using the four snaps.
3. Fold down the MINI Picnic Bench to-
ward the rear. The MINI Picnic Bench is
fastened with magnets.
4. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor
downward.
To disassemble the MINI Picnic Bench, pro-
ceed in reverse order.
Seite 235
Cargo area CONTROLS
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Folding down
1. Lift the rear part of the cargo area floor.
2. Grasp the MINI Picnic Bench in the mid-
dle and pull it back and up against the
force of the magnets.
3. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor
downward and place the MINI Picnic
Bench over the loading lip of the cargo
area. Place a protective cloth over the
bumper.
Folding up
Fold rear part of the cargo floor panel up-
ward.
The MINI Picnic Bench swings against the
underside of the cargo area floor and is fas-
tened there with magnets.
Seite 236
CONTROLS Cargo area
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Seite 237
Cargo area CONTROLS
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving .................................................. 240
Saving fuel ............................................................................................... 245
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to begin working to-
gether smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to
achieve a long vehicle life and good effi-
ciency.
Safety information
WARNING
Due to new parts and components, safety
and driver assistance systems can react
with a delay. There is a risk of an accident.
After installing new parts or with a new
vehicle, drive conservatively and inter-
vene early if necessary. Observe the break-
in procedures of the respective parts and
components.
Engine, transmission, and axle
drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and
road speed:
– For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all cir-
cumstances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually
be increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac-
turing circumstances when tires are brand-
new; they achieve their full traction poten-
tial after a break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their
full effectiveness after ap-
prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately
during this break-in period.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob-
served if any of the components above-men-
tioned have to be renewed in the course of
the vehicle's operating life.
Seite 240
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Safety information
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi-
cle and can endanger occupants and other
traffic participants or damage the vehicle
in the event of an accident, braking or eva-
sive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust
fumes may enter the car's interior. There
is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Do not drive with the tailgate
open.
Driving with the tailgate open
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
– Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
– Greatly increase the air flow from the
vents.
– Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust gas system
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera-
tures can occur underneath the vehicle
body, for instance caused by the exhaust
gas system. If combustible materials, such
as leaves or grass, come in contact with
hot parts of the exhaust gas system, these
materials can ignite. There is a risk of in-
jury or risk of damage to property. Do not
remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make
sure that no combustible materials can
come in contact with hot vehicle parts in
driving operation, idle or during parking.
Do not touch the hot exhaust gas system.
Mobile communication devices in
the vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can
influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mo-
bile phones. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. If possible, in
the car's interior use only mobile phones
with direct connections to an exterior an-
tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer-
ence and deflect the radiation from the
car's interior.
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water
can form between the tires and road sur-
face.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-
planing. It is characterized by a partial or
complete loss of contact between the tires
and the road surface, ultimately undermin-
ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi-
cle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, follow the fol-
lowing:
– Drive through calm water only.
– Drive through water only if it is not
deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
– Drive through water no faster than
walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Seite 241
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Safety information
NOTICE
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the en-
gine compartment, the electrical system or
the transmission. There is a risk of damage
to property. When driving through water,
do not exceed the maximum indicated wa-
ter level and the maximum speed for driv-
ing through water.
Braking safely
General information
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a
standard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations
that require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still
avoid any obstacles with a minimum of
steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds
from the hydraulic circuits indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
Objects in the area around the pedals
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed
pedal. There is a risk of an accident. Stow
objects in the vehicle such that they are
secured and cannot enter into the driver's
floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable
for the vehicle and can be safely attached
to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats
and do not layer several floor mats. Make
sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are
securely fastened again after they were re-
moved, for instance for cleaning.
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy
rain, gently press the brake pedal every few
miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other traffic.
The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects
them against corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be avail-
able when you need it.
Hills
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in
the gear that requires least braking effort.
Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and re-
duce brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first
gear, if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing
out and possibly even brake failure. There
is a risk of an accident. Avoid placing ex-
cessive stress on the brake system.
WARNING
In idle state, in GREEN Mode or with
drive-ready state switched off, safety-rele-
vant functions, for instance engine brak-
ing effect, braking force boost, and steer-
ing assistance, are restricted or not
Seite 242
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
available at all. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Do not drive in idle state, in GREEN
Mode or with drive-ready state switched
off.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contami-
nation on the brake pads are increased by
the following circumstances:
– Low mileage.
– Extended periods when the vehicle is
not used at all.
– Infrequent use of the brakes.
– Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will
cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in
their response - generally this cannot be
corrected.
Condensation water under the
parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops and collects
underneath the vehicle.
Ground clearance
NOTICE
If ground clearance is insufficient, there
might be contact with the front or rear
spoiler, for instance when driving over
curbs or entering into underground vehi-
cle parking garages. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Ensure that there is suffi-
cient ground clearance available.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
General information
Installation only possible with roof rack.
Roof racks are available as special accesso-
ries.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the
roof rack.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise
the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded,
they have a major effect on vehicle handling
and steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
– Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
– Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
– Distribute the roof load uniformly.
– The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
– Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
– Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in-
stance using ratchet straps.
– Do not let objects project into the open-
ing path of the tailgate.
– Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac-
celeration and braking maneuvers. Take
corners gently.
Seite 243
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Driving on poor roads
Concept
Because of its greater ground clearance, the
vehicle can be driven on a variety of road
types and qualities.
Safety information
NOTICE
Objects in unpaved areas, for instance
stones or branches, can damage the vehi-
cle. There is a risk of damage to property.
Do not drive on unpaved terrain.
When driving on poor roads
For your own safety, for the safety of pas-
sengers and of the vehicle, heed the follow-
ing points:
– Familiarize yourself with the vehicle be-
fore driving.
– Do not take risks when driving.
– Adjust the speed to the road surface
conditions. The steeper and more un-
even the road surface, the slower the
speed.
– When driving on steep uphill or down-
hill grades: add engine oil and coolant
up to near the MAX mark.
– Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in
contact with the ground. The ground
clearance may vary depending on the
vehicle load.
– When wheels continue to spin, depress
the accelerator so that driving stability
control systems can distribute the driv-
ing force to the wheels. Activate DTC
Dynamic Traction Control if available.
After a trip on poor roads
Note the following to maintain driving
safety:
– Clear heavy soiling from the body.
– Keep the wheels and tires free of mud,
snow, ice, etc., and check them for dam-
age.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty.
The vehicle is not designed for use in motor
sports competition.
Seite 244
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
for the reduction of fuel consumption and
emission values.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of
different factors.
The implementation of certain measures,
driving style and regular maintenance can
influence fuel consumption and environ-
mental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consump-
tion.
Remove attached parts follow-
ing use
Remove roof-mounted luggage racks which
are no longer required following use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the
aerodynamics and increase the fuel con-
sumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, for instance tire size may influence
fuel consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire infla-
tion pressure at least twice a month and be-
fore starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling
resistance and thus raises fuel consumption
and tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up
while the vehicle remains stationary. Start
driving right away, but at moderate engine
speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine
to reach its operating temperature.
Seite 245
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Look well ahead when driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces
fuel consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak-
ing.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the
vehicle driving ahead of you.
Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel
consumption and reduces wear.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops,
for instance at traffic lights, railroad cross-
ings or in traffic congestion.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy
and consume additional fuel, especially in
city and stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
Have maintenance carried out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to
achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv-
ice life. MINI recommends that mainte-
nance work be performed by a MINI service
center.
Also note the MINI maintenance systems,
refer to page 292.
Using the hybrid system effi-
ciently
Concept
The vehicle's hybrid system runs automati-
cally. Through foresighted driving, the hy-
brid properties are efficiently used, i.e., fuel
consumption and energy recovery are opti-
mized.
Optimizing energy recovery
Types of energy recovery
Energy recovery is used to charge the high-
voltage battery. Energy recovery is impor-
tant for the supply of electrical components
and thus a prerequisite for fuel efficiency.
Energy recovery appears in three stages
during coasting and braking:
– Low energy recovery: while coasting to
a halt without stepping on the brake.
– Average energy recovery: while deceler-
ating slightly by gently pressing the
brake pedal.
– Maximum energy recovery: when press-
ing the brake pedal somewhat more
firmly provided that the pointer remains
in the middle area of the CHARGE indi-
cator in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 140.
Optimum energy recovery
Foresighted driving and decelerating helps
with optimizing energy recovery.
As soon as the display shows the maximum
energy recovery, only press the brake pedal
harder if required by the situation.
Seite 246
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Exemplary traffic situations for fuel
efficiency
In many driving situations, the hybrid sys-
tem allows for a particularly efficient en-
ergy management.
– Stop-and-go traffic:
The combustion engine is switched on
or over automatically by the hybrid sys-
tem.
– Driving with constant speed:
The electric motor relieves the combus-
tion engine periodically by also being
switched on.
Optimizing fuel consumption
Charging the vehicle regularly
Charge the vehicle regularly and completely
using a suitable charging device. This will
reduce fuel consumption due to the use of
electrical energy.
Longer idle periods, refer to page 316, can
reduce the charge state of the high-voltage
battery.
Avoiding the use of the combustion
engine
Follow the following information to avoid
using the combustion engine:
– Set the characteristics of the hybrid sys-
tem to MAX eDRIVE, refer to page 121.
– Follow the indicators in the instrument
cluster regarding electric driving, refer
to page 140.
Using the navigation system regularly
Use the navigation system also for familiar
and regularly traveled routes. When the
navigation system destination guidance is
active, the hybrid system uses the existing
navigation data. The upcoming course of
the road is analyzed. Hybrid operation
adapts to the specific route sections.
The function may be restricted if the navi-
gation data is invalid, outdated or not avail-
able, for example.
GREEN Mode
Concept
GREEN Mode supports a driving style that
saves on fuel consumption. For this pur-
pose, the engine control and comfort fea-
tures, for instance the climate control out-
put, are adjusted.
Under certain conditions the engine is auto-
matically decoupled from the transmission
in the D selector lever position and the en-
gine is switched off. The D selector lever
position remains engaged.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions
are displayed to assist with an optimized
fuel consumption driving style.
Activating GREEN Mode
Press the MINI Driving Modes
switch downward until
GREEN is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
Configuring GREEN
Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1. Activating GREEN Mode.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Select the desired setting.
Seite 247
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Via the Central Information Display
(CID)
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Configure GREEN"
4. Select the desired setting.
Activating/deactivating the functions
The following functions can be activated/
deactivated:
– "GREEN speed warning":
– "GREEN climate control"
Settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
GREEN Limit
– Activate the GREEN Limit:
"GREEN speed warning":
A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of
the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.
– Setting the speed for the GREEN Limit:
"Tip at:"
Select the desired speed.
GREEN climate control
Climate control is set to be efficient.
By making a slight change to the set tem-
perature, or adjusting the rate of heating or
cooling of the car's interior consumption
can be economized.
The power output to the seat heater and ex-
terior mirror is reduced.
GREEN potential savings
Shows potential savings with the current
settings in percentages.
Indications on the Control Display
GREEN tip, driving instruction
The GREEN tip indicates that your driving
style can be modified to be more efficient,
for example by backing off the accelerator.
Open GREEN Tip display
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "GREEN tips"
GREEN tip, symbols
An additional symbol and text instructions
are displayed.
Symbol Measure
For an efficient driving style,
look well ahead when driving,
accelerate conservatively, and
delay accelerating.
Reduce speed to the selected
GREEN speed.
Steptronic transmission:
Switch from M/S to D and avoid
manual shift interventions.
Seite 248
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Seite 249
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle ............................................................................. 252
Refueling .................................................................................................. 261
Fuel ............................................................................................................ 264
Wheels and tires .................................................................................... 266
Engine compartment ............................................................................ 283
Engine oil ................................................................................................. 286
Coolant ...................................................................................................... 290
Maintenance ........................................................................................... 292
Replacing components ......................................................................... 294
Breakdown assistance .......................................................................... 305
Care ............................................................................................................ 312
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Charging the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Concept
The vehicle can be charged using various
charging cables at charging stations or
household sockets. Control and monitoring
of the charging process are handled com-
pletely automatically. The charge current
strength can be set via the Central Informa-
tion Display (CID).
General information
High-voltage battery
The high-voltage battery is used as an en-
ergy accumulator. The high-voltage battery
can be charged by energy recovery during
the trip or via the power grid.
In order to operate the high-voltage battery
optimally, charge the vehicle regularly and
completely on a compatible charger.
When charging via the power grid, you can
chose between the following variants.
– Level 1 charging via a household socket.
– Level 2 charging via a Level 2 charging
station.
Level 1 charging is possible via a household
socket with a voltage of 120 volts.
For optimal use of the energy from the
power mains, charging at a charging sta-
tion, for instance BMW Wallbox, is recom-
mended.
Charge current
General information
The charge current strength is indicated in
amperes.
The vehicle cannot automatically detect the
maximum permissible charge current
strength of the power grid during charging
via a household socket or charging station.
Level 1 charging
Prior to the first Level 1 charging at your
own household socket, as well as when
charging at external electrical power sock-
ets in Level 1, the allowed charge current
strength must be determined, for instance
by a qualified electrician.
The charge current strength for
Level 1 charging, refer to page 258, can be
adjusted in the vehicle in three levels.
At delivery, the charge current for
Level 1 charging is set to the lowest level.
Depending on the country-specific version,
one of several ampere ratings is printed on
the Level 1 charging cable. This ampere rat-
ing is the limit which must be adhered to
for the vehicle if the charge current is set to
the highest level. Depending on the charg-
ing cable, the charge current strength may
vary when lower levels are set.
Seite 252
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Overview
Imprint on the charging cable Charge current setting
"Max." "Reduced" "Low"
8 A 8 A 6 A 6 A
10 A 10 A 7.5 A 6 A
12 A 12 A 9 A 6 A
15 A 15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A
Depending on the charge current setting,
the charging duration changes.
Maintaining charge state
Should it be necessary, for instance to con-
serve the electric range for a later point in
time on the trip, the current charge state of
the high-voltage battery can be maintained
or increased with SAVE BATTERY, refer to
page 121.
Safety information
WARNING
Improper working with electrical current
can lead to an electric shock due to high
voltages or high currents. There is a risk
of fire or danger to life. Observe the gen-
eral safety regulations when working with
electrical current.
WARNING
A faulty and incorrectly designed charging
device at the charging location can cause
damage to the vehicle and overload the
power mains at the charging location.
There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that, prior to your first use of a
charging location, you have the compati-
bility of the following components con-
firmed:
– Charging cable.
– Charging station.
– Household socket and connected cir-
cuits.
WARNING
Damaged or worn charging devices, for in-
stance worn contacts, can heat up. There
is a risk of fire. Only use charging devices
in proper state.
WARNING
If a sufficient safety distance from easily
flammable materials is not maintained, si-
multaneous charging and filling with fuel
can cause a risk of fire. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not fill the vehicle with fuel and charge it
simultaneously.
Seite 253
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
WARNING
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. High voltage is applied
at the charging connection. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that work on the charging connec-
tion, for instance cleaning, be performed
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Charging cable
General information
Use a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 charg-
ing cable or the permanently installed
charging cable of a charging station to
charge the vehicle.
Different charging cables can be required
depending on the country.
Safety information
WARNING
Non-compatible charging cables or unsuit-
able charging stations can heat up and
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a
risk of fire. Use charging cables or charg-
ing stations for charging that are suitable
for the respective vehicle type.
A dealer's service center will be glad to
provide information about suitable charg-
ing cables.
WARNING
Improper use of the charging cable can
prevent charging and lead to damage, for
instance cable fire. There is a risk of fire.
Use the charging cable only for charging
the vehicle, and do not extend it using ca-
bles or adapters.
WARNING
Damaged charging cables can heat up or
lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of
fire or a risk of injury. Use undamaged
charging cables only.
Level 1 charging cable
The vehicle is supplied with a
Level 1 charging cable.
With the Level 1 charging cable, it is per-
missible to perform charging from grounded
household sockets. At the power connection
of a household socket, charging is done
with alternating current.
When a Level 1 charging cable is used, this
may produce efficiency values other than
indicated on the energy label.
Level 2 charging cable
The Level 2 charging cable makes it possi-
ble to quickly recharge at sockets of desig-
nated Level 2 charging stations using a spe-
cial plug. Charging is performed with
alternating current at designated
Level 2 charging stations. The charging
process can be completed faster than at
household sockets.
A charging current strength of up to maxi-
mum 16 A is possible.
If necessary, the charging cable is attached
to the charging station.
Seite 254
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Storage
The Level 1 charging cable is located in a
bag in the cargo area.
Store charging cable again in the bag after
use. Attach the bag to the designated eyelet.
If required, store the charging cable with
the installed plug cover to prevent moisture
in the charging cable plug.
Connecting
Charging socket flap
The charging socket flap is located on the
left side of the vehicle.
Always keep charging socket clean and un-
obstructed.
Keep the charging socket flap closed when
the charging socket is not used.
Connecting the charging cable
To connect, engage selector lever posi-
tion P, deactivate drive-ready state, and un-
lock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, if
needed.
1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow.
2. Remove cover of the charging cable
plug, if needed.
3. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging
cable to the port on the charging station.
4. Insert the charging cable plug corre-
sponding to the charging socket, and
push it in until it engages.
Removing
When the vehicle is locked, the charging
cable is locked. Unlock the vehicle before
removing the cable.
If necessary, clean the area between charg-
ing socket flap and charging socket, for in-
stance from snow, before removing it.
1. Unlock the vehicle by remote control if
it is locked.
Charging cable is unlocked.
2. Press the release button on the handle,
arrow 1, and grasp the charging cable at
the gripping areas.
Seite 255
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Charging process is interrupted.
3. Remove the charging cable from the
charging socket, arrow 2.
4. Put the charging socket lid back on.
5. Close the charging socket flap.
6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug,
if needed.
7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from
the household socket or Level 2 charg-
ing cable from the port on the charging
station as needed.
8. Stow the charging cable.
At a charging station, insert the perma-
nently installed charging cable in the
place provided for it.
Emergency unlocking
The charging cable is locked when the vehi-
cle is locked and during the charging proc-
ess.
In case of an electrical malfunction, the
charging cable can be manually unlocked.
1. Open the hood.
2. Pull the knob.
Charging cable is manually unlocked.
3. Removing the charging cable, refer to
page 255.
Have the locking system of the charging
socket checked at the dealer’s service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or re-
pair shop after emergency unlocking of the
charging cable.
Charging process
General information
At high temperatures, the high-voltage bat-
tery is initially cooled. There may be a delay
before charging starts. If the high-voltage
battery is discharged, cooling of the high-
voltage battery may not be possible. The
charging process cannot be started.
If the Level 1 charging cable is exposed to
high temperatures and direct sunlight, this
may interrupt the charging process. Charg-
ing resumes automatically.
The charging process may take longer under
extremely low or high temperatures.
Safety information
WARNING
Improper use of the power mains connec-
tion can lead to damage, for instance cable
fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Use the charging ca-
Seite 256
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
ble only for charging the vehicle, and do
not extend it using cables or adapters.
WARNING
If the charge current strength is adjusted
incorrectly, the power mains of the house-
hold socket can be overloaded and over-
heat. There is a risk of fire. Adjust the
charge current strength to the power
mains prior to charging on household
sockets. With unknown power networks,
set on the lowest level.
Starting the charging process
1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the
parking brake, if needed.
2. Planning the charging process, refer to
page 258.
3. Switch off drive-ready state.
4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging
cable to the port on the charging station.
5. Open charging socket flap.
6. Connect charging cable to the vehicle,
refer to page 255.
7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
Display of the charging status
Indicator light at the charging socket
An indicator light is located on the charging
socket.
Charging status
Light Charging status
White Charging cable can be con-
nected or removed.
Flashes or-
ange
Charging process is being
prepared.
Yellow The charging process
starts at the set time.
Flashes yel-
low
Charging process is active.
Flashes red
rapidly
Fault in the charging proc-
ess.
Green Charging process is com-
pleted.
When the vehicle is locked, the indicator
light goes out after some time.
When the vehicle is unlocked, the yellow
indicator light flashes continuously. The
other indicator lights go out after some
time.
Press the button of the remote control
to check the charging status. The charging
Seite 257
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
status is indicated on the indicator light. In
some cases the vehicle is locked.
Additional messages about the charging sta-
tus, for instance the probable end of charg-
ing or the planned departure time, can be
shown in the instrument cluster or on the
Control Display.
Planning the charging process
General information
The charging process can be adapted to
constraints, for instance the cost of electric-
ity. The vehicle can control the charging
process in such a way that the charging
process is completed at the departure time.
A departure time must be set for this pur-
pose, refer to page 259.
The following settings are available:
– Immediate charging.
– Set time window for favorable charging.
– Set the charge current for charging via a
Level 1 charging cable.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes
can be made via the Central Information
Display (CID). Settings for stationary cli-
mate control and charging process are also
accepted for planned departure times.
Immediate charging
The charging process starts as soon as the
charging cable is connected.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Charge immediately"
Setting time window for favorable
charging
When a departure time is set, a time win-
dow for charging with a favorable electric-
ity rate can be set via the Central Informa-
tion Display (CID).
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Charge for departure time"
4. "Set low cost time slot"
5. Set rate begin.
6. Set rate end.
The vehicle can also start the charging proc-
ess before the selected time window begins
or end it after the selected time window fin-
ishes. The starting point of the charging
process is adjusted so the vehicle can be
fully charged and, if applicable, its climate
controlled right up to the departure time.
Setting the charge current for
charging via a Level 1 charging cable
Depending on the electrical mains, the vehi-
cle must be charged with a different charg-
ing current strength, refer to page 252.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Settings charging current"
Settings are stored. When you change
charging locations you also might need to
change the setting for charging.
Set the charge current strength at other
household sockets to the lowest level.
Stopping the charging process
The charging process can be stopped at any
time by removing the charging cable and
continued at a later time by connecting the
charging cable. This enables, for instance
the use of other loads on the power connec-
tion or prevents simultaneous high power
from multiple loads.
Seite 258
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Removing the charging cable, refer to
page 255.
Continuing the charging process
If the charging process is interrupted, for
instance through a temporary power failure,
the charging process is automatically con-
tinued after the interruption.
Terminating the charging process
1. Remove the charging cable from the ve-
hicle, refer to page 255.
2. Stow the charging cable as required.
3. Close the charging socket flap.
4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
The charge state indicator light, refer to
page 152, shows the charge state of the
high-voltage battery in the instrument clus-
ter, if the ignition or drive-ready state is
switched on. If all bars are filled, the high-
voltage battery is fully charged.
Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltage
system is still under high voltage.
Information regarding the charging process
are shown on the charging screen.
Display Meaning
Ring flashes orange: the charg-
ing process is being prepared.
Ring yellow: the charging proc-
ess starts at the set time.
Ring flashes yellow: the charg-
ing process is active.
Ring flashes red rapidly: fault in
the charging process.
Ring green: the charging proc-
ess is completed.
End of charging time or set de-
parture time.
Departure time set.
Climate control activated at de-
parture time.
Flashing: ventilation active.
Flashing: heating active.
Flashing: cooling active.
Departure time
Concept
For optimum range and climate control, the
departure time can be set before parking
the vehicle.
General information
With a set departure time, the vehicle is
pre-heated or pre-cooled during the charg-
ing process if climate control is set. Climate
Seite 259
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
control output is reduced during the trip.
This increases the range during electric
driving.
The following settings are possible at depar-
ture time:
– Climate control at departure time.
– Planning of up to two regular departure
times.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes
can be made via the Central Information
Display (CID). Settings for climate control
and charging process are also applied for
scheduled departure times.
Climate control at departure time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Precondition for departure"
Setting the departure time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Set departure time"
4. Set the desired time.
Up to two departure times can be set.
Activating the departure time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Set departure time"
Set departure times are displayed.
4. For example activate "Departure time 1".
Up to two departure times can be activated.
The set departure time will be deactivated,
if the departure time was ignored three
times in a row.
Climate control
The following settings for climate control of
the vehicle are possible:
– Activate stationary climate control im-
mediately, refer to page 218.
With stationary climate control acti-
vated and no charging cable connected,
the range is reduced.
– Planned climate control at the set depar-
ture time, refer to page 219.
If a Mode 2 charging cable is used, the
high-voltage battery may not be fully
charged at departure time.
Discharged high-voltage and
vehicle battery
General information
In addition to the high-voltage battery, the
vehicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which
is required for operation of the onboard
electronics.
If the high-voltage battery is discharged and
the combustion engine is started, air condi-
tioning may be limited.
With a discharged vehicle battery, no oper-
ation of the vehicle is possible.
Starting the vehicle
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the
combustion engine can be started using the
battery of another vehicle and two jumper
cables, see Jump-starting, refer to
page 307.
Seite 260
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 264, prior to refueling.
To also ensure all engine functions under
unfavorable conditions, for instance steep
vehicle inclinations, at least 3 US gal/10 li-
ters fuel should be refueled.
Safety information
NOTICE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer
have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are
not ensured anymore. There is a risk of
damage to property. Refuel promptly.
WARNING
If a sufficient safety distance from easily
flammable materials is not maintained, si-
multaneous charging and filling with fuel
can cause a risk of fire. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not fill the vehicle with fuel and charge it
simultaneously.
Tank vent
Concept
The vehicle is equipped with a special fuel
tank. The fuel tank is designed for special
requirements that arise from hybrid opera-
tion of the vehicle, i.e., alternating drive
with combustion engine or electric motor.
General information
In the fuel tank, excess pressure can build
up due to gasoline vapors which are dissi-
pated before the fuel cap is opened.
Overview
The switch is located in the storage com-
partment of the driver's door.
Tank venting
1. Switch off drive-ready state.
2. Pull the switch to start the pres-
sure equalization.
The status of the tank venting is dis-
played in the instrument cluster. In rare
cases, the tank venting can last several
minutes.
If the tank venting has been completed,
a message is displayed in the instrument
cluster. The fuel filler flap is released for
opening.
3. Open the fuel filler flap.
Seite 261
Refueling MOBILITY
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
If it is not possible to open the fuel filler
flap after tank venting, pull the switch
again.
If it is still not possible to open the fuel
filler flap even after the switch has been
pulled, unlock the fuel filler flap man-
ually, refer to page 262.
Fuel cap
Opening
Before opening, vent the tank, refer to
page 261.
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel
filler flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-
tached to the fuel filler flap.
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The
cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel
vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Pay atten-
tion that the retaining strap is not jammed
or crushed when closing the cap.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until
you clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunc-
tion.
The release is located in the cargo area.
1. Remove the cover.
Seite 262
MOBILITY Refueling
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump
symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
3. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel
filler flap. Fuel filler flap is opened.
Follow the following when re-
fueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle
completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the
fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes:
– Premature switching off.
– Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle
clicks off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed prop-
erly after refueling, otherwise the emissions
warning light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Safety informationSafety
information
WARNING
If a sufficient safety distance from easily
flammable materials is not maintained, si-
multaneous charging and filling with fuel
can cause a risk of fire. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not fill the vehicle with fuel and charge it
simultaneously.
NOTICE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling
of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys-
tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by
contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm
the environment. There is a risk of damage
to property. Avoid overfilling.
Seite 263
Refueling MOBILITY
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter
or summer conditions. Fuel that is available
in winter, for instance helps make a cold
start easier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur
content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as
containing metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refu-
eling.
Ethanol should meet the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in
each case.
Safety information
NOTICE
Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel
system and engine. Furthermore, the cata-
lytic converter is permanently damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not refuel or add the following in the case
of gasoline engines:
– Leaded gasoline.
– Metallic additives, for instance man-
ganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
NOTICE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system
and the engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use fuels with a higher
percentage of ethanol than recommended.
Do not refuel with fuels containing metha-
nol, e.g. M5 to M100.
NOTICE
Fuel that does not comply with the mini-
mum quality can compromise engine func-
tion or cause engine damage. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not fill with
fuel that does not comply with the mini-
mum quality.
Seite 264
MOBILITY Fuel
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi-
tionally, problems relating to drivability,
starting and stalling, especially under cer-
tain environmental conditions such as
high ambient temperature and high alti-
tude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered,
we recommend switching to a high quality
gasoline brand and a higher octane grade
— AKI number — for a few tank fills. To
avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly
recommended to purchase gasoline from
Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommenda-
tions may result in the need for unsched-
uled maintenance.
Recommended fuel grade
MINI recommends AKI 91.
Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the
rated performance and consumption values.
Minimum fuel grade
MINI recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI
Rating, the engine may produce knocking
sounds when starting at high external tem-
peratures. This has no effect on the engine
life.
Seite 265
Fuel MOBILITY
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Tire inflation pressure
General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation
pressure influence the following:
– The service life of the tires.
– Road safety.
– Driving comfort.
– Fuel consumption.
Safety information
WARNING
A tire with too little or no tire inflation
pressure may heat up significantly and
sustain damage. This will have a negative
impact on aspects of handling, such as
steering and braking response. There is a
risk of an accident. Regularly check the
tire inflation pressure, and correct it as
needed, for instance twice a month and be-
fore a long trip.
Tire inflation pressure
specifications
In the tire inflation pressure table
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 267, contains all tire inflation pres-
sure specifications for the specified tire
sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire
inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes
approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle
for the vehicle type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pres-
sure, please note the following:
– Tire sizes of your vehicle.
– Maximum permitted driving speed.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
General information
Tires heat up while driving. The tire infla-
tion pressure increases with the tire tem-
perature.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire
inflation pressure.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking using tire inflation pressure
specifications in the tire inflation
pressure table
The tire inflation pressure specifications in
the tire inflation pressure table only relate
to cold tires or tires at the same tempera-
ture as the ambient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels
when the tires are cold, i.e.:
– Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km
has not been exceeded.
Seite 266
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least 2 hours after a trip.
1. Determine, refer to page 266, the in-
tended tire inflation pressure levels for
the mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires, using a pressure gage, for ex-
ample.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the
current tire inflation pressure value de-
viates from the specified value.
4. Check whether all valve caps are
screwed onto the tire valves.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset
the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and
for optimum driving comfort, note the pres-
sure values in the tire inflation pressure ta-
ble, refer to page 267, and adjust as neces-
sary.
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driv-
er's door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/
160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
COOPER SE
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
225/55 R 17
97 H M+S
Std/RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
225/50 R 18
95 W RSC
225/50 R 18
95 H M+S RSC
225/50 R 18
95 V M+S A/S
Std/RSC
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex-
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please ob-
serve, and, if necessary, adjust tire pres-
sures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/
160 km/h from the relevant table on the
following pages. Otherwise, tire damage
and accidents could occur.
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table,
refer to page 268, and adjust as necessary.
Seite 267
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
COOPER SE
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
225/55 R 17
97 H M+S
Std/RSC
2.3 / 33 2.7 / 39
225/50 R 18
95 W RSC
225/50 R 18
95 H M+S RSC
225/50 R 18
95 V M+S A/S
Std/RSC
2.5 / 36 2.9 / 42
Tire identification marks
Tire size
205/45 R 17 84 V
205: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
17: rim diameter in inches
84: load rating, not for ZR tires
V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permis-
sible weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire
sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
– GAWR – on the certification label on the
driver’s door pillar. Divide the tire load by
1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the
vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating –
GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire
loads, respectively.
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R = 106 mph/170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 2118
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
2118: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines
of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the
tire on the tire's sidewall.
Designation Manufacture date
DOT … 2118 21st week 2018
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applica-
ble on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width.
Seite 268
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera-
ture A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. E.g., a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-
half, 1 g, times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the ac-
tual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service prac-
tices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified govern-
ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction per-
formance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest,
B, and C, representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-
ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perform-
ance which all passenger vehicle tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un-
derinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 272, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the let-
ters RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an in-
creased risk of hydroplaning.
Seite 269
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable
for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re-
quired minimum height of 0.063 in-
ches/1.6 mm.
The positions of the wear indicators are
marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, for-
eign objects lodged in the tread, and tread
wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfa-
ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta-
cles can cause serious damage to wheels,
tires and suspension parts. This is more
likely to occur with low-profile tires, which
provide less cushioning between the wheel
and the road. Be careful to avoid road haz-
ards and reduce your speed, especially if
your vehicle is equipped with low-profile
tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle
malfunctions:
– Unusual vibrations.
– Unusual tire or running noises.
– Unusual handling such as a strong ten-
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by the following sit-
uations, for instance:
– Driving over curbs.
– Road damage.
– Tire inflation pressure too low.
– Vehicle overloading.
– Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con-
trol. There is a risk of an accident. If tire
damage is suspected while driving, imme-
diately reduce speed and stop. Have
wheels and tires checked. For this pur-
pose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed
or transported as needed. Do not repair
damaged tires, but have them replaced.
WARNING
Tires can become damaged by driving over
obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller
tire cross-section. The smaller the tire
cross-section, the higher the risk of tire
damage. There is a danger of accidents and
property damage. If possible, drive around
obstacles, or drive over them slowly and
carefully.
Seite 270
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting and wheel balancing
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop about the correct wheel/tire combina-
tion and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the
vehicle, for instance due to contact with
the body due to tolerances despite the
same official size rating. There is a risk of
an accident. The manufacturer of your ve-
hicle strongly suggests that you use
wheels and tires that have been recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type.
WARNING
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will
have a negative impact on the vehicle's
handling and on the function of a variety
of systems, such as the Anti-lock Brake
System or Dynamic Stability Control.
There is a risk of an accident. To maintain
good handling and vehicle response, use
only tires with a single tread configuration
from a single manufacturer. The manufac-
turer of the vehicle recommends that you
use wheels and tires that have been rec-
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer
for your vehicle type. Following tire dam-
age, have the original wheel/tire combina-
tion remounted on the vehicle as soon as
possible.
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the
vehicle recommends certain tire brands.
The tire brands can be identified by a star
on the tire sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac-
turing circumstances when tires are brand-
new; they achieve their full traction poten-
tial after a break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire cas-
ing structures. With advanced age the
service life can be limited. There is a risk
of an accident. The manufacturer of your
vehicle does not recommend the use of re-
treaded tires.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
recommend the use of retreaded tires.
Seite 271
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operat-
ing on winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro-
vide better winter traction than summer
tires, they usually do not provide the same
level of performance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is
higher than the permissible speed for the
winter tires, then attach a label showing the
permissible maximum speed in the field of
view. The label is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do
not exceed the permissible maximum speed.
Changing runflat tires
For your own safety, use only runflat tires.
No spare tire is available in the case of a flat
tire. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the
front and rear axles depending on individual
driving conditions. The tires can be rotated
in pairs between the axles to achieve even
wear. Further information is available from
a dealer’s service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop. After ro-
tating, check the tire pressure and correct,
if needed.
Storing tires
Air pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure indicated on the side wall of the
tire.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and
dark place.
Always protect tires against all contact with
oil, grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Run-flat tires
Concept
Run-flat tires permit continued driving un-
der restricted conditions even in the event
of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.
General information
The wheels are composed of tires that are
self-supporting to a limited degree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire
to remain drivable to a restricted degree in
the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driv-
ing with a flat tire.
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure;
for instance, your lane stability when
braking is reduced, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Seite 272
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Label
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall
with RSC Run-flat System Component.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
– Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
– Switch on the hazard warning system.
– Secure the vehicle against rolling away
by setting the parking brake.
– Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-
tion and engage the steering wheel lock.
– Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle
at an appropriate distance.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire dam-
age can be sealed temporarily to enable con-
tinued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is
pumped into the tires, which seals the dam-
age from the inside.
General information
– Follow the instructions on using the
Mobility System found on the compres-
sor and sealant container.
– Use of the Mobility System may be inef-
fective if the tire puncture measures ap-
prox. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
– Contact a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
– If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire. Only re-
move foreign objects if they are visibly
protruding from the tire.
– Pull the speed limit sticker off the seal-
ant container and apply it to the steer-
ing wheel.
– The use of a sealant can damage the
TPM wheel electronics. In this case,
have the TPM wheel electronics re-
placed at the next opportunity.
– The compressor can be used to check
the tire inflation pressure.
Overview
Storage
The Mobility System is located in a bag on
the right side trim in the cargo area.
Sealant container
– Sealant container, arrow 1.
– Filling hose, arrow 2.
Seite 273
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Observe use-by date on the sealant con-
tainer.
Compressor
1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Sealant container holder
3 Tire pressure gage
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Safety measures
– Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
– Switch on the hazard warning system.
– Secure the vehicle against rolling away
by setting the parking brake.
– Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-
tion and engage the steering wheel lock.
– Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle
at an appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases
can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust
gases contain pollutants which are color-
less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep
the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient
ventilation.
NOTICE
The compressor can overheat during ex-
tended operation. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Do not run the compres-
sor for more than 10 minutes.
Filling
1. Shake the sealant container.
Seite 274
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the
cover of the sealant container. Do not
kink the hose.
3. Slide the sealant container into the
holder on the compressor housing, en-
suring that it engages audibly.
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con-
tainer onto the tire valve of the non-
working wheel.
5. With the compressor switched off, in-
sert the plug into the power socket in-
side the vehicle.
6. With the ignition switched on or the en-
gine running, switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes
to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant,
the tire inflation pressure may sporadically
reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the
compressor at this point.
Checking and adjusting the tire
inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the
tire pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pres-
sure of at least 2 bar must be reached.
Seite 275
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Removing and stowing the sealant
container
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant
container from the tire valve.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
3. Remove the sealant container from the
compressor.
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in
suitable material to avoid dirtying the
cargo area.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not
reached
1. Pull the connector out of the power
socket inside the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the com-
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
4. Insert the connector into the power
socket inside the vehicle.
5. With the ignition switched on or the en-
gine running, switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least
2 bar cannot be reached, contact your
dealer’s service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least
2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla-
tion pressure is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the
compressor from the tire valve.
7. Pull the connector out of the power
socket inside the vehicle.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
reached
1. Unscrew the connection hose of the
compressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power
socket inside the vehicle.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx.
5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant
is evenly distributed in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less
than 12 mph/20 km/h.
Adjustment
1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com-
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
Seite 276
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
3. Insert the connector into the power
socket inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at
least 2.0 bar.
– Increase tire inflation pressure: with
the ignition switched on or the en-
gine running, switch on the com-
pressor.
– Reduce tire inflation pressure: press
the button on the compressor.
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the
compressor from the tire valve.
6. Pull the connector out of the power
socket inside the vehicle.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 176.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
page 171.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System promptly.
Snow chains
General information
The manufacturer of the vehicle has deter-
mined certain wheels and tires to be suita-
ble for operation on the vehicle. Mounting
of snow chains on these wheels and tires is
not permitted.
Safety information
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on un-
suitable tires, the snow chains can come
into contact with vehicle parts. There is a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Do not mount snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a
wheel does not always need to be changed
immediately when there is a loss of tire in-
flation pressure due to a flat tire.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
The vehicle jack is only provided for short-
term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
changes. Even if all safety measures are
observed, there is a risk of the raised vehi-
cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
vehicle and do not start the engine.
Seite 277
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
DANGER
Supports such as wooden blocks under the
vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve-
hicle jack to bear weight. They have the
potential to exert too much strain on the
vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the
vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not place supports under
the vehicle jack.
WARNING
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac-
turer, is provided in order to perform a
wheel change in the event of a breakdown.
The jack is not designed for frequent use;
for example, changing from summer to
winter tires. Using the jack frequently may
cause it to become jammed or damaged.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage
to property. Only use the jack to attach an
emergency or spare wheel in the event of
a breakdown.
WARNING
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex-
ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack
can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If
possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid,
and slip-resistant surface.
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on
the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury.
Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using
the vehicle jack.
WARNING
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
jacking point provided for this purpose,
the vehicle may be damaged or the vehicle
jack may slip when it is being cranked up.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. When cranking up the vehicle
jack, ensure that it is inserted in the jack-
ing point next to the wheel housing.
WARNING
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are
exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. While the ve-
hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces
on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi-
cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Securing the vehicle against rolling
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to
additionally secure the vehicle against roll-
ing away when changing a wheel.
Seite 278
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
On a level surface
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects
in front and behind the wheel that is diago-
nal to the wheel to be changed.
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight
downhill grade, place chocks and other suit-
able objects, for instance a rock, under the
wheels of both the front and rear axles
against the rolling direction.
Lug bolt lock
Concept
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding.
The lug bolts can only be released with the
adapter which matches the coding.
Overview
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is located in
the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to
page 294.
– Lug bolt, arrow 1.
– Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing
the lug bolt.
Screwing on
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If
necessary, turn the adapter until it fits
on the lug bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening
torque is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after
screwing on the lug bolt.
Preparing the vehicle
– Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from traffic.
– Switch on the hazard warning system.
– Set the parking brake.
– Engage a gear or move the selector lever
to position P.
– As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
Seite 279
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
279
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
– Depending on the vehicle equipment,
get wheel change tools and, if necessary,
the emergency wheel from the vehicle.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle
or portable hazard warning light at an
appropriate distance.
– Secure the vehicle additionally against
rolling.
– Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are
located at the marked positions.
Jacking up the vehicle
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed when
using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of
injury. Comply with the described hand
position and do not change this position
while using the vehicle jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar-
row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank
or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan-
gular recess of the jacking point closest
to the wheel to be changed.
Seite 280
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
280
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the
vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle
jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under
load and continue turning the vehicle
jack crank or lever with one hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot
stands vertically and at a right angle be-
neath the jacking point.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot
stands vertically and perpendicularly be-
neath the jacking point after extending
the vehicle jack.
7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the en-
tire surface of the jack is in contact with
the ground and the wheel in question is
raised a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off
the ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as re-
quired.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel
on and screw in at least two lug bolts in
a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the
vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the
accompanying lug bolts may have to be
used as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts
and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross-
wise pattern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counter-
clockwise to retract the vehicle jack and
lower the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se-
curely.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The
tightening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area, if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of
its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next
opportunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are
tight with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the
nearest dealer’s service center or an-
Seite 281
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
281
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Seite 282
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Overview
1 Filler neck for washer fluid
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Coolant reservoir, high-voltage technol-
ogy
4 Oil filler neck
5 Jump-starting, positive terminal
6 Jump-starting, negative terminal
7 Unlocking, charging cable
8 Coolant reservoir, engine
Seite 283
Engine compartment MOBILITY
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Hood
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle compo-
nents and impair vehicle functions. There
is a risk of personal and property damage.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that, in the effort to avoid such
risks, work in the engine compartment be
performed by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
WARNING
The engine compartment accommodates
moving components. Certain components
in the engine compartment can also move
with the vehicle switched off, for instance
the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.
Do not reach into the area of moving parts.
Keep articles of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for instance
locking hook, on the inside of the hood.
There is a risk of injury. If the hood is
open, pay attention to protruding parts
and keep clear of these areas.
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open while
driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of an accident. Stop immediately and
correctly close the hood.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when opening
and closing the hood. There is a risk of in-
jury. Make sure that the area of movement
of the hood is clear during opening and
closing.
NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when
the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening
the hood.
NOTICE
When the hood is closed, it must engage
on both sides. Pressing again can damage
the hood. There is a risk of damage to
property. Open the hood again and then
close it energetically. Avoid pressing
again.
Opening the hood
1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
Seite 284
MOBILITY Engine compartment
284
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is opened, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
Let the hood fall from approx. 16 in-
ches/40 cm, arrow.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 285
Engine compartment MOBILITY
285
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
your driving style and driving conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil
level after refueling by taking a detailed
measurement.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for example:
– Sporty driving style.
– Break-in of the engine.
– Idling of the engine.
– With use of engine oil types that are
classified as not suitable.
Different Check Control messages appear,
depending on the engine oil level.
Safety information
NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of damage
to property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the en-
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not add too
much engine oil. When too much engine
oil is added, have the engine oil level cor-
rected by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Electronic oil measurement
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two
measuring principles:
– Monitoring.
– Detailed measurement.
When making frequent short-distance trips
or using a dynamic driving style, for in-
stance when taking curves aggressively,
regularly perform a detailed measurement.
Monitoring
Concept
The engine oil level is monitored electroni-
cally while driving and can be shown on the
Control Display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permis-
sible operating range, a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed.
A red indicator light indicates that
the engine oil pressure is too low.
Seite 286
MOBILITY Engine oil
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after
approx. 30 minutes of normal driving with
the combustion engine running.
Displaying the engine oil level
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips
or using a dynamic driving style, it may not
be possible to calculate a measured value.
In this case, the measured value for the last,
sufficiently long trip is displayed.
Detailed measurement
Concept
The engine oil level is checked when the ve-
hicle is stationary and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permis-
sible operating range, a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed.
General information
During the measurement, the idle speed is
increased somewhat.
Functional requirements
– Vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
tion.
– Drive-ready state is established.
– Steptronic transmission: selector lever
in selector lever position N or P and ac-
celerator pedal not depressed.
– The combustion engine is at operating
temperature.
Performing a detailed measurement
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
5. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and dis-
played via a scale.
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is
displayed in the instrument cluster. The
quantity to be added is indicated in the
message displayed in the instrument clus-
ter.
Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer
to page 288.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off the
ignition and drive-ready state before adding
engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating materials, for instance oils,
greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harm-
ful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Follow the instructions
on the containers. Avoid the contact of ar-
ticles of clothing, skin or eyes with operat-
ing materials. Do not refill operating mate-
rials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
Seite 287
Engine oil MOBILITY
287
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
NOTICE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of damage
to property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the en-
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not add too
much engine oil. When too much engine
oil is added, have the engine oil level cor-
rected by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine
compartment, refer to page 283.
Adding engine oil
1. Open the hood, refer to page 284.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
4. Close the cap.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life
of the engine.
Only add the types of engine oil which are
listed.
Safety information
NOTICE
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not use oil additives.
NOTICE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc-
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a
risk of damage to property. When select-
ing an engine oil, make sure that the en-
gine oil has the correct oil rating.
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil
rating standards:
Oil rating
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use
is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an
engine oil with the following oil rating can
be added:
Seite 288
MOBILITY Engine oil
288
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Oil rating
API SL.
API SM.
API SN.
Viscosity grades
When selecting an engine oil, make sure
that the engine oil belongs to one of the fol-
lowing viscosity grades:
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-20.
SAE 0W-30.
More information about suitable engine oil
ratings and viscosities of engine oils can be
requested from a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Engine oil change
NOTICE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear
and thus engine damage. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not exceed the
service data indicated in the vehicle.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
change the engine oil.
Seite 289
Engine oil MOBILITY
289
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
General information
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about
suitable additives is available from a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys-
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only
open the cooling system with the engine
cooled down.
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi-
tives can damage the engine. There is a
risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-
erty. Do not allow additives to come into
contact with skin, eyes or articles of cloth-
ing. Use suitable additives only.
Coolant level
Concept
The vehicle features two cooling circuits.
Always check the coolant levels of both
coolant reservoirs and refill as needed.
Checking
There are yellow Min and Max marks in the
coolant reservoir.
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir
slightly counterclockwise to allow any
excess pressure to dissipate, then open
it.
Seite 290
MOBILITY Coolant
290
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be-
tween the minimum and maximum
marks in the filler neck.
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir
slightly counterclockwise to allow any
excess pressure to dissipate, then open
it.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant
up to the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Close the cap.
6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environ-
mental protection regulations when
disposing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 291
Coolant MOBILITY
291
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
MINI maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby pro-
vides support in maintaining road safety
and the operational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the
maintenance system may vary according to
the country version. Replacement work,
spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear
materials are calculated separately. Further
information is available from a dealer’s serv-
ice center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Condition Based Service CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac-
count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
CBS uses these to calculate the need for
maintenance.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to
your user profile.
General information
Information on service requirements, refer
to page 148, can be displayed on the Control
Display.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control.
The dealer’s service center can read this
data out and suggest an optimized mainte-
nance scope for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the re-
mote control with which the vehicle was
driven most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle
battery was disconnected are not taken into
account.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop update the time-dependent mainte-
nance procedures, such as checking brake
fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine
oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter.
Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models
and Warranty and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian
models
Please consult your Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models for additional information
on service requirements.
Seite 292
MOBILITY Maintenance
292
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that maintenance and repair be per-
formed by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop. Records of regular maintenance and
repair work should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard Diag-
nosis
General information
Devices connected to the OBD socket trig-
ger the alarm system when the vehicle is
locked. Remove any devices connected at
the OBD socket before locking the vehicle.
Safety information
NOTICE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in-
tricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys-
tem. Improper use of the socket for On-
board Diagnosis, or contact with the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other
than its intended purpose, can cause vehi-
cle malfunctions and creates risks of per-
sonal and property damage. Given the fore-
going, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to
a dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop or other
persons that have the specialized training
and equipment for purposes of properly
utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side
for checking the primary components in the
vehicle's emissions.
Emissions
– The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating.
Have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
– The warning light flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive
misfiring in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief
period can seriously damage emission
control components, in particular the
catalytic converter.
Seite 293
Maintenance MOBILITY
293
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The bag containing the onboard vehicle tool
kit is located beneath the cargo floor panel.
After use, secure the bag with the onboard
vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTICE
The window may sustain damage if the
wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade
installed. There is a risk of damage to
property. Hold the wiper firmly when
changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or
switch on the wiper without a wiper blade
installed.
NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when
the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening
the hood.
Replacing the front wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and swing out
the wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper
blade must engage audibly.
5. Fold down the wiper arm.
Seite 294
MOBILITY Replacing components
294
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Rear wiper blade
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
2. Pull the wiper blade out of the wiper
arm.
3. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper
blade must engage audibly.
4. Fold down the wiper arm.
Light and bulb replacement
General information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contri-
bution to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-
mends that you have appropriate work per-
formed by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not
been described here.
A spare light box is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 295.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source. These light-emitting diodes are re-
lated to conventional lasers and are offi-
cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting
diodes.
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 295.
Safety information
Lights and bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con-
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There
is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after
they have cooled off.
WARNING
Work on switched-on lighting systems can
cause short circuits. There is a risk of in-
jury or risk of damage to property. When
working on the lighting system, switch off
the lights in question. If necessary, heed
the bulb manufacturer's instructions.
NOTICE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not hold new bulbs with your bare hands.
Use a clean cloth or something similar, or
hold the bulb by its base.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
WARNING
Intensive brightness can irritate or dam-
age the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the head-
lights or other light sources. Do not re-
move the LED covers.
Seite 295
Replacing components MOBILITY
295
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the
headlight glass in cool or humid weather.
When driving with the lights switched on,
the condensation evaporates after a short
time. The headlight glass does not need to
be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights
switched on, increasing humidity forms, for
instance water droplets in the light, have
the headlights checked.
Headlight setting
The headlight adjustments can be affected
by changing lights and bulbs. After the
headlight adjustment was changed, have it
checked and, if necessary, corrected by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Front halogen lights, bulb
replacement
Overview
Halogen headlights
1 High beams
2 Low beams
3 Turn signal
Bug light
1 Parking lights
2 Daytime running lights
3 Fog lights
High beams
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 295.
Bulbs: H7
1. Open the hood, refer to page 284.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and re-
move.
Seite 296
MOBILITY Replacing components
296
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
3. Tilt the bulb holder up, arrow 1, and pull
it out of the headlight toward the rear,
arrow 2.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
5. Install the new bulb with the bulb
holder in reverse order of removal. In
doing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor-
rectly positioned in the headlight hous-
ing and the bulb holder perceptibly en-
gages.
6. Check the position of the bulb through
the headlight glass.
7. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Make sure that the lid engages.
Low beams
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 295.
Bulbs: H7
1. Turn the steering wheel.
2.
– On the left facing the driving direc-
tion: turn the cover clockwise and
remove it.
– On the right facing the driving direc-
tion: turn the cover counterclock-
wise and remove it.
3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock-
wise, and remove it.
4. Tilt the bulb holder down, arrow 1, and
pull it downward out of the headlight,
arrow 2.
5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
6. Install the new bulb with the bulb
holder in reverse order of removal. In
doing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor-
rectly positioned in the headlight hous-
ing and the bulb holder perceptibly en-
gages.
Seite 297
Replacing components MOBILITY
297
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
7. Check the position of the bulb through
the headlight glass.
8. Install the covers. Make sure that the
covers engage.
Turn signal
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 295.
Bulbs: PWY24W
1. Turn the steering wheel.
2.
– On the left facing the driving direc-
tion: turn the cover clockwise and
remove it.
– On the right facing the driving direc-
tion: turn the cover counterclock-
wise and remove it.
3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclock-
wise, and remove it.
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise,
arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2.
5. Press the bulb gently into the bulb
holder, turn counterclockwise and re-
move.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cov-
ers in the reverse order. Make sure that
the covers engage.
Parking lights/fog lights/daytime
running lights
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 295.
Bulbs:
– Parking lights: W5W
– Daytime running light: PSX24W.
– Fog light: H8.
Seite 298
MOBILITY Replacing components
298
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Replacing the bulbs
1. Pull the cover forward out of the
bumper.
2. Remove the screws and take out the
front light.
3. Remove the bulb holder.
– Parking lights: turn the bulb holder,
arrow 1, counterclockwise and re-
move.
– Daytime running lights: squeeze the
upper and lower locks of the bulb, ar-
row 2, and remove the bulb.
For better accessibility, remove the
bulb of the fog light as needed.
– Fog lights: turn the bulb, arrow 3,
counterclockwise and remove it.
4.
– Parking lights: pull the bulb out of
the fixture.
– Fog lights and daytime running
lights: disconnect the bulb from the
cable.
5. Insert the new bulb and install the cover
in the reverse order.
The daytime running lights bulb holder
engages audibly, first below, then above.
LED front lights, bulb replacement
General information
The following lights feature LED technol-
ogy:
– Daytime running lights
– High beams
– Low beams
– Cornering light
– Parking lights
– Fog lights
In the case of a malfunction, contact a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
Seite 299
Replacing components MOBILITY
299
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Overview
Position of the headlights
1 Turn signal
2 Daytime running lights
3 Low beams/high beams
4 Cornering light
LED bug light
1 Parking lights
2 Fog lights
Turn signal
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 295.
Bulbs: PWY24W.
1. Open the hood, refer to page 284.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and re-
move.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise,
arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2.
4. Press the bulb gently into the bulb
holder, turn counterclockwise and re-
move.
5. Insert the new bulb and install the cover
in the reverse order.
Seite 300
MOBILITY Replacing components
300
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Tail lights, bulb replacement
Overview
1 Side tail lights
2 Center brake light
3 License plate light
Side tail lights
1 Brake lights/tail lights
2 Turn signal
3 Reversing lights
Side LED tail lights
1 Brake light
2 Tail lights
3 Turn signal
4 Reversing lights
Side tail lights
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 295.
– Bulb, brake lights/rear lights, tail lights:
P21W
– Bulb, brake lights/LED tail lights: H21W
– Bulb, turn signal: P21W
– Bulb, reversing lights: P21W
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove left or right cover.
3. Through the opening, loosen the plug
connector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.
Seite 301
Replacing components MOBILITY
301
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Press the latches together, arrows 1, and
remove the bulb holder.
4. Remove the bulb holder from the open-
ing.
5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into
the socket, turn counterclockwise and
remove.
– Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights
– Arrow 2: turn signal
– Arrow 3: reversing light
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert
the new bulb and attach the bulb holder.
Make sure that the bulb holder engages
in all fasteners.
Central brake light and license plate
lights
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 295.
The lights feature LED technology. In the
case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Side turn signal, bulb replacement
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 295.
Bulb: WY5W
1. Push the side turn signal forward in the
driving direction, arrow 1, and swing it
outward, arrow 2.
2.
– On the left facing the driving direc-
tion: turn the bulb holder clockwise
and remove.
– On the right facing the driving direc-
tion: turn the bulb holder counter-
clockwise and remove.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Insert the bulb holder.
5. Insert the rear side turn signal, arrow 1,
and swing it forward, arrow 2.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
Seite 302
MOBILITY Replacing components
302
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
The added amount of acid is sufficient for
the service life of the battery.
More information about the battery can be
requested from a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Replacing the vehicle battery
General information
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that you have a dealer’s service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or re-
pair shop register the vehicle battery to the
vehicle after the battery has been replaced.
Once the battery has been registered again,
all comfort features will be available with-
out restriction and any Check Control mes-
sages displayed which relate to comfort fea-
tures will disappear.
Safety information
NOTICE
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair
vehicle functions. There is a risk of per-
sonal and property damage. Only vehicle
batteries that are compatible with your ve-
hicle type should be installed in your vehi-
cle. Information on compatible vehicle bat-
teries is available at your dealer’s service
center.
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi-
ciently charged to guarantee that the bat-
tery remains usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by
a red indicator light.
The battery may need to be charged in the
following cases:
– When making frequent short-distance
drives.
– If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
– Steptronic transmission: when parked
for long periods of time in selector lever
position D, R or N.
Safety information
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board
network can be overloaded or damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Only
connect battery chargers for the vehicle
battery to the starting aid terminals in the
engine compartment.
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via
the starting aid terminals, refer to
page 308, in the engine compartment with
the engine off.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs
to be newly initialized or individual settings
updated, for example:
– Time: update.
– Date: update.
– Seat and mirror memory: store the posi-
tions again.
– Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Seite 303
Replacing components MOBILITY
303
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair
shop or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position
for transport and storage. Secure the battery
so that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a
risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a
blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking
fuse with a substitute of another color or
amperage rating.
Accessing the fuses
The fuses are located in the glove compart-
ment.
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Swing the cover down, arrow.
Information on the fuse types and locations,
as well as the positions of any other fuse
boxes, is found on a separate sheet in the
fuse box.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer's service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
replace the fuses.
Seite 304
MOBILITY Replacing components
304
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located above the Control Dis-
play.
The red light in the button flashes when the
hazard warning flashers are activated.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the tail-
gate. To remove, loosen the brackets.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service
life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.
MINI Roadside Assistance
Concept
MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted
if assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown.
Seite 305
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
305
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
General information
In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve-
hicle's condition is sent directly to the man-
ufacturer of your vehicle.
Contact can also be made via a Check Con-
trol message, refer to page 142.
Starting Roadside Assistance
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices,
support is offered through Teleservice Diag-
nosis.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
The contact to the Roadside Assistance
of the manufacture is established.
A telephone number is displayed, if
needed. Select to dial the telephone
number on a connected mobile phone.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is
important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is
transmitted automatically.
Starting Teleservice Help
Depending on the country, the Teleservice
Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of
the vehicle via wireless transmission.
You can launch Teleservice Help by re-
questing it through the Service Specialist.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Control Display is switched on.
4. "Teleservice Help"
The driving ability of the vehicle can be re-
stored for specific functions.
If this is not possible, further measures will
be initiated, for instance Roadside Assis-
tance will be informed.
Intelligent emergency call
Concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re-
quest can be made through the system.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Re-
quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavora-
ble conditions.
Overview
SOS button in the roofliner
Functional requirements
– Standby state is switched on.
– The Assist system is functional.
– The SIM card integrated in the vehicle
has been activated.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, for instance if the
airbags trigger, an Emergency Request is
automatically initiated immediately after an
accident of corresponding severity. Auto-
Seite 306
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
306
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
matic Collision Notification is not affected
by pressing the SOS button.
Initiating an Emergency Request
manually
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at
the button lights up green.
– The LED is illuminated green when an
Emergency Request has been initiated.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehi-
cle until the voice connection has been
established.
– The LED flashes green when a connec-
tion to the MINI Response Center has
been established.
The MINI Response Center then makes
contact with you and takes further steps
to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
MINI Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum-
stances.
For this, data is transmitted to the MINI
Response Center which serve to deter-
mine the necessary rescue measures.
E.g., the current position of the vehicle,
if it can be established.
If you can no longer hear the MINI Re-
sponse Center through the loudspeakers,
the hands-free system, for instance, may
be broken. However, the MINI Response
Center may still be able to hear you.
The MINI Response Center ends the Emer-
gency Request.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started using the battery of another vehi-
cle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper
cables with fully insulated clamp handles.
Vehicles with hybrid drive cannot be used
for jump-starting.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of inju-
ries or danger to life. Do not touch any
components that are under voltage.
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There
is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the cor-
rect order during connection.
NOTICE
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur dur-
ing jump-starting. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Make sure that no body
contact occurs.
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The
voltage information can be found on the
battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting
vehicle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Seite 307
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
307
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Starting aid terminals
The starting aid terminal in the engine com-
partment acts as the battery's positive ter-
minal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
A special connection on the body acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
To prevent personal injury or damage to
both vehicles, adhere strictly to the follow-
ing procedure.
1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid termi-
nal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the posi-
tive jumper cable to the positive termi-
nal of the battery, or to the correspond-
ing starting aid terminal of the vehicle
providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other
end of the cable to the positive terminal
of the battery, or to the corresponding
starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be
started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the nega-
tive jumper cable to the negative termi-
nal of the battery, or to the correspond-
ing engine or body ground of assisting
vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to
the corresponding engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Establishing drive-ready state
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an
increased idle speed.
2. Establish the drive-ready state for the
vehicle to be started as usual.
If the first starting attempt is not suc-
cessful, wait a few minutes before mak-
ing another attempt in order to allow the
discharged battery to recharge.
3. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re-
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Transporting the vehicle
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Seite 308
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
308
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Safety information
NOTICE
The vehicle can be damaged when towing
the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There
is a risk of damage to property. The vehi-
cle should only be transported on a loading
platform.
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
danger area, push it for a short distance at a
speed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h.
Roll or push, refer to page 135, the vehicle.
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
NOTICE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its
tow fitting, body parts, or suspension
parts.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, de-
pending on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win-
dow.
Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the
towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle
to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or
it will not be possible to control the vehi-
cle's response. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Make sure that the gross vehicle
weight of the towing vehicle is heavier
than the vehicle to be towed.
NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in-
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts
can occur. There is a risk of damage to
property. Correctly attach the tow bar or
tow rope to the tow fitting.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mount-
ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol-
low the following:
– Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
– The tow bar will generate lateral forces
if it is secured with an offset.
Seite 309
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
309
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be
carried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool
kit, refer to page 294, are together in the
cargo area.
Use of the tow fitting:
– Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
– Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
– Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting,
for instance do not lift the vehicle by the
tow fitting.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there may be damage to the vehicle or to
the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage
to property. Follow the notes on using the
tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo-
cated in the front and rear of the vehicle on
the right side with respect to the direction
of travel.
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover
to push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due
to the Steptronic transmission.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties
corrected by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Seite 310
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
310
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
What to do after an accident
Safety information
WARNING
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of inju-
ries or danger to life. After an accident, do
not touch any high-voltage components
such as orange colored high-voltage cables
or parts that are in contact with exposed
high-voltage cables.
WARNING
Fluids in the high-voltage battery are cor-
rosive. There is a risk of injury. Do not
touch fluids escaping from the high-volt-
age battery.
General information
After an accident, compliance with the fol-
lowing safety precautions is required with
regard to the high-voltage system:
– Secure the crash site.
– Immediately notify rescue forces, police,
or firefighters of the fact that your vehi-
cle is equipped with a high-voltage sys-
tem.
– Engage selector lever position P, set the
parking brake, and switch off the igni-
tion and drive-ready state.
– Lock the vehicle after exiting.
– Do not inhale any gases escaping from
the high-voltage battery; if needed,
maintain a safe distance from the vehi-
cle.
Seite 311
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
311
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
Washing the vehicle
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield
when the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly
in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can
damage the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. High voltage is applied
at the charging connection. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that work on the charging connec-
tion, for instance cleaning, be performed
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
NOTICE
When washing, water can get into the
open charging socket. There is a risk of
damage to property. Close the charging
socket flap while washing.
Steam jets or high-pressure
washers
Safety information
NOTICE
When cleaning with high-pressure wash-
ers, components can be damaged due to
the pressure or temperatures being too
high. There is a risk of damage to property.
Maintain sufficient distance and do not
spray too long continuously. Follow the
operating instructions for the high-pres-
sure washer.
Distances and temperature
– Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
– Minimum distance from sensors, cam-
eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
– Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Seite 312
MOBILITY Care
312
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTICE
Improper use of automatic vehicle washes
can cause damage to the vehicle. There is
a risk of damage to property. Follow the
following instructions:
– Give preference to cloth vehicle
washes or those that use soft brushes
in order to avoid paint damage.
– Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid dam-
age to the chassis.
– Observe the tire width of the guide
rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.
– Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid dam-
age to the exterior mirrors.
– With rod antenna: unscrew the rod
antenna to avoid rod antenna break-
age.
– Deactivate the wiper and, if neces-
sary, rain sensor to avoid damage to
the wiper system.
Driving into a vehicle wash with a
Steptronic transmission
In vehicle washes, the vehicle must be able
to roll freely.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 135.
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons
in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked
from the outside when in selector lever po-
sition N. A signal is sounded when an at-
tempt is made to lock the vehicle.
Driving out of a vehicle wash
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
Activate drive-ready state, refer to
page 117.
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not
use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in-
stance from insects, with shampoo and
wash off with water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac-
tion can be reduced. The heat generated
during braking dries brake discs and brake
pads and protects them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win-
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
MINI recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s serv-
ice center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that are
dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning
the interior, open the doors or windows.
Seite 313
Care MOBILITY
313
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Only use products intended for cleaning
vehicles. Follow the instructions on the
container.
Vehicle paint
General information
Regular care contributes to driving safety
and value retention. Environmental influen-
ces in areas with elevated air pollution or
natural contaminants, such as tree resin or
pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork.
Tailor the frequency and extent of your ve-
hicle care to these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel,
oil, grease or bird droppings, must be re-
moved immediately to prevent the finish
from being altered or discolored.
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly performed work on the vehicle
paint can lead to a failure or malfunction
of the radar sensors and thereby result in a
safety risk. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Have paint-
work or paintwork repairs on bumpers of
vehicles with radar sensors performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop only.
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suita-
ble for vehicles with matte finish.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, us-
ing a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to in-
creased wear and premature degradation of
the leather surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather
care roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently
because soiling on such surfaces is substan-
tially more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt
and grease will gradually break down the
protective layer of the leather surface.
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a
vacuum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with
beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro-
fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams us-
ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing
the material vigorously.
Safety information
NOTICE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers.
There is a risk of damage to property. En-
sure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to
9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or
steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning
agents can destroy the protective layer of
Seite 314
MOBILITY Care
314
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
adjacent components, such as the brake
disc.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to
dry them. The heat generated during brak-
ing dries brake discs and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the ra-
diator grille or door handles with an ample
supply of water, possibly with shampoo
added, particularly when they have been ex-
posed to road salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss.
Use only water and suitable cleaning agents
for cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub-
ber care agents at regular intervals. When
cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili-
con-containing vehicle care products in or-
der to avoid damage or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood com-
ponents only with a moist rag. Then dry
with a soft cloth.
Plastic components
NOTICE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents,
such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to
property. Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Plastic components are e.g.:
– Imitation leather surfaces.
– Roofliner.
– Light lenses.
– Instrument cluster cover.
– Matt black spray-coated components.
– Painted parts in the car's interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Safety belts
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety
belt webbing. Missing protective effect of
the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol-
ution for cleaning the safety belts.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action
and thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the
safety belts clipped into their buckles.
Safety belts should only be allowed to re-
tract if they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed
pedal. There is a risk of an accident. Stow
objects in the vehicle such that they are
secured and cannot enter into the driver's
floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable
for the vehicle and can be safely attached
to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats
and do not layer several floor mats. Make
sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are
securely fastened again after they were re-
moved, for instance for cleaning.
Seite 315
Care MOBILITY
315
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Floor mats can be removed from the car's
interior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with
a microfiber cloth and water or a textile
cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet,
rub back and forth in the direction of travel
only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of
glass detergent.
Displays/Screens/Projection lenses
NOTICE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of dis-
plays and screens. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Clean with a clean, anti-
static microfiber cloth.
NOTICE
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of
damage to property. Avoid pressure that is
too high and do not use any scratching
materials.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.
For stubborn soiling on the projection lens
of the Head-up Display, dampen the micro-
fiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, re-
fer to page 157.
Long idle times and long-term
vehicle storage
Concept
For idle phases that last several weeks, park
the vehicle with a fully charged battery if
possible.
Do not park the vehicle for longer than
14 days if the electric range is exhausted.
With storage times of up to three months, if
possible plug the vehicle into a compatible
power source or park it in a nearly fully
charged state.
General information
Your dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop can
advise you on what to consider when stor-
ing the vehicle for longer than three
months.
Safety information
NOTICE
The high-voltage battery can be damaged
by excessive discharge. There is a risk of
damage to property. Before storing the ve-
hicle for an extended period, ensure that
the high-voltage battery is fully charged.
During the idle period, connect the vehicle
to a charging station at a compatible
charging location. If necessary, the high-
voltage battery will be charged automati-
cally. Make sure that the charging process
takes place. Regularly check the charge
state.
Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for lon-
ger than three months with a charge state
below approx. 50 %.
Seite 316
MOBILITY Care
316
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Seite 317
Care MOBILITY
317
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
318
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
REFERENCE
Technical data ......................................................................................... 320
Appendix .................................................................................................. 322
Everything from A to Z ........................................................................ 324
319
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle,
e. g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
and regulations must be observed.
General information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance val-
ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviate
from this, for instance due to the selected
special equipment, country version or coun-
try-specific measurement method. Detailed
values can be found in the approval docu-
ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob-
tained from a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-spe-
cific measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into ac-
count attached parts, for instance a roof an-
tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can
deviate, for instance due to the selected
special equipment, tires, load and chassis
version.
MINI Countryman
Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.9/2,005
Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.7/1,822
Height inches/mm 61.4/1,559
Length inches/mm 169.8/4,314
Wheelbase inches/mm 105.1/2,670
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.5/11.4
Seite 320
REFERENCE Technical data
320
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Weights
MINI Countryman
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,016/2,275
Load lbs/kg 926/420
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,458/1,115
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,646/1,200
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 364/165
Capacities
MINI Countryman US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 9.5/36.0 Fuel quality, refer to
page 264.
Seite 321
Technical data REFERENCE
321
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the
vehicle are listed here.
Updates made after the editorial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's
Manual contain updates made after the edi-
torial deadline:
– Information: Data storage, refer to
page 12.
Seite 322
REFERENCE Appendix
322
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Seite 323
Appendix REFERENCE
323
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake System 187
Accessories and parts 10
Accident, what to do 311
ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 191
Acoustic pedestrian protection 122
AC quick charging cable, see Level 2 charg-
ing cable 254
Activated-charcoal filter 217
Activating, drive-ready state 118
Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based
cruise control 191
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 178
Adapting to the course of the road, hybrid
system 141
Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force dis-
play 185
Additives, engine oil types 288
Adjustments, steering wheel 110
Advance climate control, see Stationary cli-
mate control 218
After washing vehicle 313
Airbags 167
Airbags, indicator and warning light 169
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air
mode 212, 216
Air conditioner 211
Air conditioning 212, 215
Air, dehumidifying, see Air condition-
ing 212, 215
Air distribution, manual 213, 217
Air flow, air conditioner 213
Air flow, automatic climate control 216
Air pressure, tires 266
Air vents, see Ventilation 217
Alarm system 93
Alarm triggering 93
Alarm, unintentional 94
Alertness assistant 185
All-season tires, see Winter tires 272
Antifreeze, washer fluid 132
Antilock Brake System, ABS 187
Anti-slip control, see DSC 187
Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 279
Approach control warning with city light
braking function 179
Approved axle load 321
Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Arrival time 154
Artificial engine noise, see Acoustic pedes-
trian protection 122
Ash tray 224
Assistance for the combustion engine 123
Assistance when driving off 190
AUTO intensity 216
Automatic climate control 214
Automatic Curb Monitor 109
Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen-
ger airbags 169
Automatic headlight control 162
Automatic locking 92
Automatic recirculated-air control 216
Automatic transmission with Step-
tronic 133
Automatic unlocking 92
Automatic vehicle wash 313
AUTO program, automatic climate con-
trol 215
AUTO program, intensity 216
Auto Start/Stop function 119
Auto washing 312
Average fuel consumption 153
Average speed 153
Axle loads, weights 321
Seite 324
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
324
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
B
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar sup-
port 100, 101
Backrest, seats 99
Band-aids, see First-aid kit 305
Battery replacement, vehicle battery 303
Battery, vehicle 302
Being towed, see Tow-starting and tow-
ing 308
Belts, safety belts 103
Beverage holder, cup holder 228
Blocking, power window 96
Bluetooth connection 61
Bottle holder, see Cup holder 228
Brake assistant 187
Brake discs, break-in 240
Brake force display 185
Brake lights, brake force display 185
Brake pads, break-in 240
Braking, information 242
Breakdown assistance 305
Break-in 240
Brightness of Control Display 58
Bug light 296
Bulb replacement 295
Bulb replacement, front 296, 299
Bulb replacement, rear 301
Bulb replacement, side 302
Bulbs and lights 295
Button, SOS 306
Button, Start/Stop 116
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 307
C
Calendar, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
California Proposition 65 Warning 11
Calling up mirror adjustment 92
Calling up seat adjustment 92
Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel-
ligent Safety 178
Camera-based cruise control 191
Camera lenses, care 316
Camera, rearview camera 203
Can holder, see Cup holder 228
Care, displays 316
Care, vehicle 313
Care, washing the vehicle 312
Cargo area 230
Cargo area, adapting size 234
Cargo area, enlarging 233
Cargo area lid 85
Cargo area, loading 231
Cargo area, seating surface 235
Cargo area, storage compartments 232
Cargo cover 231
Cargo, stowing and securing 231
Cargo straps 231
Carpet, care 315
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas
system 241
CBS Condition Based Service 292
Center armrest 228
Center console 42
Central Information Display (CID) 44
Central Information Display (CID) operating
concept 44
Central instrument cluster, LED ring 156
Central locking system, unlocking, from in-
side 81
Central screen, see Control Display 46
Changes, technical, see For Your Own
Safety 10
Changing parts 294
Changing wheels 277
Changing wheels/tires 271
CHARGE, energy recovery 123
Charge state indicator, high-voltage bat-
tery 152
Charging battery, see Vehicle charging 252
Charging cable storage 255
Charging cable, unlocking manually 256
Charging screen 139
Charging, see Charging the vehicle 252
Charging, see Vehicle charging 252
Charging status, see Display of the charging
status 257
Charging the vehicle 252
Seite 325
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
325
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Charging the vehicle, see Vehicle charg-
ing 252
Chassis number, see Vehicle identification
number 15
Check Control 142
Checking the oil level electronically 286
Children, seating position 111
Children, transporting safely 111
Child restraint system 111
Child restraint system LATCH 113
Child restraint systems, mounting 112
Child safety locks 115
Child seat, mounting 112
Child seats 111
Chrome parts, care 315
Cigarette lighter 224
Cleaning, displays 316
Climate control 211, 214
Clothes hooks 229
Coasting 122
Combination switch, see Turn signals 125
Combi switch, see Wiper system 126, 129
Comfort Access 82
Compartments in the doors 228
Compass 222
Compatible devices, see Suitable devi-
ces 61
Compressor 273
Computer, see Onboard Computer 151
Condensation on windows 217
Condensation under the vehicle 243
Condition Based Service CBS 292
Configuring driving program 190
Confirmation signal 92
Connecting device 60
Connecting mobile phone 60
Connecting smartphone 60
Connecting telephone 60
Connections 60
Consumption, see Current consump-
tion 148
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Contact with water, hybrid system 73
Continued driving with a flat tire 174, 177
Control Display 46
Control Display, settings 56
Controller 47
Controller operation 48
Control systems, driving stability 187
Convenient closing 78
Convenient opening 77
Coolant 290
Cooling, maximum 215
Cooling system 290
Cornering light 163
Corrosion on brake discs 243
Cosmetic mirror 224
Country timer 159
Coupling, see Pairing 60
Courtesy lights during unlocking 77
Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 78
Cruise control 198
Cruise control, active 191
Cruise control with distance control, see
Camera-based cruise control 191
Cruise control without distance control, see
Cruise control 198
Cruising range 147
Cup holder 228
Current consumption 148
D
Damage, tires 270
Data memory 12
Data protection, settings 59
Data, technical 320, 321
Date 57
Date display 147
Daytime running lights 163
DCC, see Cruise control 198
Deactivating drive-ready state 119
Deactivation of the hybrid system 73
Defrosting, see Defrosting the win-
dows 213
Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 217
Defrosting the windows 213
Dehumidifying, air 212, 215
Deleting personal data 59
Deletion of personal data 59
Seite 326
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
326
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Departure times, stationary climate con-
trol 219
Destination distance 154
Device list 60
Digital clock 147
Digital compass 222
Dimensions 320
Dimmable exterior mirrors 109
Dimmable interior mirror 110
Direction indicator, see Turn signals 125
Display, electronic, instrument cluster 139
Display, engine temperature 153
Display, GREEN Mode 247
Display lighting, see Instrument light-
ing 165
Displays 138
Displays, care 316
Displays, hybrid system 139
Disposal, coolant 291
Disposal, vehicle battery 304
Distance control, see PDC 200
Distance to destination 154
Divided screen view, split screen 45
Drive-off assistant 190
Drive-off assistant, see DSC 187
Driver assistance, see Intelligent
Safety 178
Drive-ready state 116
Drive-ready state, activating 118
Drive-ready state, deactivate 119
Drive-ready state in detail 117
Driver profiles 89
Driver profiles, exporting profiles 90
Driver profiles, importing profiles 90
Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv-
ing Modes switch 189
Driving Excitement, SPORT 155
Driving instructions, break-in 240
Driving instructions, hybrid system 246
Driving mode, GREEN 247
Driving modes 189
Driving notes, general 241
Driving on poor roads 244
Driving on racetracks 244
Driving stability control systems 187
Driving tip, GREEN tip 248
Driving tips 241
Driving with combustion engine,
POWER 122
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 187
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 188
DVD, Video, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-
igation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 187
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 188
E
eASSIST, assistance for the combustion en-
gine 123
Easy Opener 84
eBOOST, assistance for the combustion en-
gine 123
eDRIVE button 120
eDRIVE, see Hybrid system 70
Electrical drive-ready state 118
Electric driving, ePOWER 120
Electric driving, MAX eDRIVE 121
Electric driving, SAVE BATTERY 121
Electronic displays, instrument cluster 139
Electronic oil measurement 286
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see
DSC 187
E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Emergency release, fuel filler flap 262
Emergency Request 306
Emergency service, see Breakdown assis-
tance 305
Emergency unlocking, charging cable 256
Energy control 148
Energy recovery, CHARGE 123
Engine, automatic stop 119
Engine compartment 283
Engine compartment, working in 284
Engine coolant 290
Engine noise, artificial, see Acoustic pedes-
trian protection 122
Engine oil 286
Engine oil, adding 287
Engine oil change 289
Engine oil filler neck 287
Seite 327
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
327
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Engine oil types to add 288
Engine start, combustion engine 118
Engine start, jump-starting 307
Engine temperature, display 153
Entering a destination, see Owner's Hand-
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
munication 8
Entering an address, navigation, see Own-
er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 8
Entering a vehicle wash 313
ePOWER, electric driving 120
Equipment, interior 220
Error displays, see Check Control 142
ESP Electronic Stability Program, see
DSC 187
Exchanging wheels/tires 271
Exhaust gas system 241
Exiting a vehicle wash 313
Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea-
ture 109
Exterior mirrors 108
Exterior mirrors, Automatic Curb Moni-
tor 109
Exterior mirrors, malfunction 108
External start 307
External temperature display 146
External temperature warning 146
Eyes for securing cargo 231
F
Failure message, see Check Control 142
False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 94
Fan, see Air flow 213, 216
Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 103
Filler neck for engine oil 287
Finding charging stations, see Charging sta-
tions and points of interest, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 8
Fine wood, care 315
First-aid kit 305
Flat tire, changing wheels 277
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 176
Flat tire, repairing 273
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 171
Flat tire, warning light 172, 176
Flooding 241
Floor carpet, care 315
Floor mats, care 315
Fogged up windows 213
Fold-away position, windshield wip-
ers 128, 131
Fold back rear seat backrests 233
Foot brake 242
For Your Own Safety 10
Front airbags 167
Front fog lights 164
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de-
activation 169
Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator
light 170
Front seats 99
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 176
Fuel 264
Fuel cap 262
Fuel consumption, see Average fuel con-
sumption 153
Fuel filler flap 262
Fuel gauge 146
Fuel quality 264
Fuel recommendation 264
Fuel, tank capacity 321
Functions, hybrid system 70
Fuse 304
G
Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer-
sal Remote Control 220
Gasoline 264
General driving notes 241
General settings 56
Glare shield 224
Glass sunroof, initialize the system 98
Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-
roof 96
Glove compartment 227
GPS geolocation, vehicle position 57
Seite 328
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
328
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 8
GREEN Mode 247
GREEN - program, driving dynamics 189
GREEN tip, driving tip 248
Gross vehicle weight, approved 321
Ground clearance 243
H
Halogen headlights 296
Handbrake, see Parking brake 123
Hand-held transmitter, alternating
code 221
Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
cation 8
Hazard warning flashers 305
Head airbag 168
Headlight control, automatic 162
Headlight courtesy delay feature 162
Headlight flasher 125
Headlight glass 296
Headlights, care 313
Head restraints, front 105
Head restraints, rear 106
Head-up Display 157
Head-up Display, see Memory function 107
Head-up Display, standard view 157
Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 231
High-beam Assistant 163
High beams 125
High beams/low beams, see High-beam As-
sistant 163
High-voltage battery, charge state indica-
tor 152
Hills 242
Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis-
tant 190
Holder for beverages 228
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote
Control 220
Homepage 8
Hood 284
Horn 40
Hot exhaust gas system 241
Hotline, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
HUD Head-up Display 157
Hybrid system, adapting to the course of
the road 141
Hybrid system, at a glance 70
Hybrid system, automatic deactivation 73
Hybrid system, contact with water 73
Hybrid system, displays 139
Hybrid system, safety 73
Hybrid system, working on 73
Hydroplaning 241
I
Ice warning, see External temperature
warning 146
Icy roads, see External temperature warn-
ing 146
Identification marks, tires 268
Identification number, see Vehicle identifi-
cation number 15
Ignition off 116
Ignition on 116
Illuminated ring, central instrument clus-
ter 156
Indication of a flat tire 172, 176
Indicator light, see Check Control 142
Individual air distribution 213, 217
Individual settings, see Driver profiles 89
Inductive charging of a smartphone, see
Wireless charging tray, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 8
Inflation pressure, tires 266
Inflation pressure warning, tires 176
Info Display, see Onboard Computer 151
Information 8
Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 172
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 176
Instrument cluster 138
Instrument cluster, electronic displays 139
Instrument lighting 165
Integrated key 80
Seite 329
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
329
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-
cle 68
Integrated Universal Remote Control 220
Intelligent emergency call 306
Intelligent Safety 178
Intended use 10
Intensity, AUTO program 216
Interior equipment 220
Interior lights 165
Interior lights during unlocking 77
Interior lights with the vehicle locked 78
Interior mirror 108
Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea-
ture 110
Interior mirror, compass 222
Interior mirror, manually dimmable 109
Interior motion sensor 94
Internet site 8
Interval display, service requirements 148
Interval mode 126, 130
In the vicinity of the center console 42
In the vicinity of the roofliner 43
In the vicinity of the steering wheel 40
IOM, see Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle 68
J
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 280
Jam protection system, glass sunroof 98
Jam protection system, windows 95
Jump-starting 307
K
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 82
Key, see Integrated key 80
Key, see Remote control 76
Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 135
Knee airbag 168
L
Label on recommended tires 271
Label, runflat tires 272
Language, on the Control Display 56
Lashing eyes 231
LATCH child restraint fixing system 113
Leather, care 314
LED ring, central instrument cluster 156
LEDs, light-emitting diodes 295
Letters and numbers, entering 49
Level 1 charging 258
Level 1 charging cable 254
Level 2 charging cable 254
Light 161
Light-alloy wheels, care 314
Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 295
Lighter 224
Lighting 161
Light replacement 295
Light replacement, front 296, 299
Light replacement, rear 301
Light replacement, side 302
Lights and bulbs 295
Light switch 161
List of all messages 58
Load 231
Loading 230
Location, vehicle position 57
Locking, automatic 92
Locking, from inside 81
Locking, settings 91
Longer idle phases 316
Long idle times and long-term vehicle stor-
age 316
Long-term vehicle storage 316
Low beams 161
Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As-
sistant 163
Lower back support 101
Lower back support, mechanical 100
Lug bolt lock 279
Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage
rack 243
Lumbar support 101
Lumbar support, mechanical 100
Seite 330
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
330
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
M
Maintaining charge state, SAVE BAT-
TERY 121
Maintenance 292
Maintenance requirements 292
Maintenance, service requirements 148
Maintenance system, MINI 292
Make-up mirror 224
Malfunction displays, see Check Con-
trol 142
Manual air distribution 213, 217
Manual air flow 213, 216
Manual brake, see Parking brake 123
Manual mode, transmission 136
Manual operation, fuel filler flap 262
Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con-
trol 201
Manual operation, rearview camera 204
Manufacturer of the MINI 10
Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-
igation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Matte finish 314
MAX eDRIVE, electric driving 121
Maximum cooling 215
Maximum speed, display 149
Maximum speed, winter tires 272
Measurement, units of 57
Mechanical key 80
Medical kit 305
Memory function 107
Menu in instrument cluster 151
Menus, Central Information Display
(CID) 48
Messages 58
Messages, see Check Control 142
Microfilter 213, 217
MID - program, driving dynamics 189
MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 8
MINI driving modes 189
MINI eDRIVE, see Hybrid system 70
MINI logo projection during unlocking 77
MINI maintenance system 292
Minimum tread, tires 270
MINI Picnic Bench 235
Mirrors 108
Mirror, see Memory function 107
Mobile communication devices in the vehi-
cle 241
Mobility System 273
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own
Safety 10
Moisture in headlight 296
Monitor, see Control Display 46
Mounting of child restraint systems 112
MP3 player, see Audio, see Owner's Hand-
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
munication 8
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 40
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 8
Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 8
N
Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 8
Neck restraints, front, see Head re-
straints 105
Neck restraints, rear, see Head re-
straints 106
Neutral cleaner, see Wheel cleaner 314
New wheels and tires 271
Notes, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
No-touch closing of the tailgate 84
No-touch opening of the tailgate 84
O
OBD Onboard Diagnostics 293
Obstacle marking, rearview camera 205
Octane rating, see Recommended fuel
grade 265
Odometer 146
Office, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Seite 331
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
331
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Officially use hybrid system 246
Oil 286
Oil, adding 287
Oil change 289
Oil change interval, service require-
ments 148
Oil filler neck 287
Oil types to add, engine 288
Old batteries, disposal 304
Onboard Computer 151
Onboard Diagnostics OBD 293
Onboard literature, printed 68
Onboard vehicle tool kit 294
On-call service, see Breakdown assis-
tance 305
Opening and closing 76
Opening, from inside 81
Operating menus, Central Information Dis-
play (CID) 44
Operation via the Controller 48
Operation via touchscreen 49
Optional equipment 9
Outside air, see Automatic recirculated-air
control 216
Owner's Manual media 68
Owner's Manual, printed 68
P
Paint, vehicle 314
Panic alarm, see Panic mode 93
Panic mode 93
Panoramic glass sunroof 96
Parallel parking assistant 206
Park Distance Control PDC 200
Parked vehicle, condensation 243
Parked vehicle ventilation, see Stationary
climate control 218
Parking aid, see PDC 200
Parking assistant 206
Parking brake 123
Parking lights 161
Parts and accessories 10
Passenger's side mirror, tilting 109
Pathway lines, rearview camera 204
PDC Park Distance Control 200
Pedestrian protection, acoustic 122
Performance Control 189
Personal profile, see Driver profiles 89
Person warning with City light braking
function 182
Picnic Bench 235
Plastic, care 315
Poor roads, driving on 244
PostCrash — iBrake 186
POWER, driving with combustion en-
gine 122
Power failure 303
Power windows 94
Pressure, tires 266
Pressure warning, tires 176
Printed onboard literature 68
Profiles, see Driver profiles 89
Programmable memory buttons, Central In-
formation Display (CID) 51
Protective function, glass sunroof 98
Protective function, windows 95
Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 47
Q
Quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging
cable 254
R
Racetrack operation 244
Radiator fluid 290
Radio-operated remote control, see Remote
control 76
Radio-ready state 116
Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Rain sensor 126, 130
Ratchet straps 231
Rear lights 301
Rear seats 102
Rearview camera 203
Rear window defroster 213, 217
Rear window wiper, operation 128, 131
Recirculated-air filter 217
Seite 332
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
332
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Recirculated-air mode 212, 216
Recommended fuel grade 265
Recommended tire brands 271
Refueling 261
Remaining range 147
Remote control, additional 79
Remote control, loss 79
Remote control, malfunction 79
Remote control, opening/closing 76
Remote control, replacing the battery 79
Remote control, universal 220
Replacing parts 294
Replacing the battery, remote control 79
Replacing wheels/tires 271
Reporting safety malfunctions 16
RES CNCL button, see Camera-based cruise
control 191
RES CNCL button, see Cruise control 198
Reserve warning, see Range 147
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 172
Retreaded tires 271
Roadside Assistance, see Breakdown assis-
tance 305
Roadside parking lights 162
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 221
RON recommended fuel grade 265
Roofliner 43
Roof load capacity 321
Roof-mounted luggage rack 243
Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
cation 8
RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflat
tires 272
Rubber components, care 315
Runflat tires 272
S
Safe braking 242
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and
front passenger seat 105
Safety belts 103
Safety belts, care 315
Safety locks, doors, and windows 115
Safety of the hybrid system 73
Safety switch, windows 96
Safety systems, airbags 167
SAVE BATTERY, electric driving 121
Saving fuel 245
Screen, see Control Display 46
Screwdriver 294
Sealant, see Mobility System 273
Seat heating, front 102
Seating position for children 111
Seat, see Memory function 107
Seats, front 99
Seats, rear 102
Securing cargo 231
Selection list in instrument cluster 151
Sensors, care 316
Service and warranty 11
Service requirements, Condition Based
Service CBS 292
Service requirements, display 148
Servotronic 190
SET button, see Camera-based cruise con-
trol 191
SET button, see Cruise control 198
Settings, locking/unlocking 91
Settings, mirrors 108
Settings on the Control Display 56
Shift gate rotary switch 189
Side airbag 167
Signaling, horn 40
Signals when unlocking 92
Sitting safely 99
Size 320
Slide/tilt glass roof 96
SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 8
SMS text messages, supplementary 145
Snow chains 277
Socket 225
Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnostics 293
Software update 66
SOS button 306
Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 8
Speed, average 153
Seite 333
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
333
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Speed Limit Info 149
Speed Limit Info, Onboard Computer 154
Speed limits, display 149
Speed warning 155
Split screen 45
Sport displays 155
SPORT program, driving dynamics 190
Sport program, transmission 135
Stability control systems 187
Standard charging cable, see Level 1 charg-
ing cable 254
Standard charging, see Level 1 charg-
ing 258
Standard equipment 9
Standard view, Head-up Display 157
Start/Stop button 116
Starting the combustion engine 118
Stationary climate control 218
Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
cation 8
Status control display, tires 171
Status information, Central Information Dis-
play (CID) 45
Status of Owner's Manual 9
Status, vehicle 160
Steering assistance 190
Steering wheel, adjusting 110
Steptronic transmission 133
Storage compartments 227
Storage, tires 272
Storing the charging cable, see Storage 255
Storing the vehicle 316
Stowing and securing cargo 231
Suitable devices 61
Suitable mobile phones 61
Summer tires, tread 269
Sun visor 224
Supplementary Owner's Manuals 68
Supplementary SMS text messages 145
Switch for driving dynamics 189
Switch, see Cockpit 40
Symbols 8
T
Tailgate 85
Tailgate, closing with no-touch activa-
tion 84
Tailgate, opening with no-touch activa-
tion 84
Tailgate via remote control 78
Tail lights 301
Tank unlocking, see Tank vent 261
Tank vent 261
Technical changes, see For Your Own
Safety 10
Technical data 320, 321
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 8
Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 8
Temperature, air conditioner 212
Temperature, automatic climate con-
trol 214
Temperature display for external tempera-
ture 146
Temperature, engine 153
Terminal, starting aid 308
Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 93
Thigh support 102
Tilt alarm sensor 94
Tilting, passenger's side mirror 109
Time 56
Time of arrival 154
Tire damage 270
Tire identification marks 268
Tire inflation pressure 266
Tire inflation pressure monitor, see
FTM 176
Tire pressure 266
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 171
Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 273
Tires, changing 271
Tire sealant, see Mobility System 273
Tires, everything on wheels and tires 266
Tires, runflat 272
Tire tread 269
Seite 334
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
334
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Tools 294
Total vehicle weight 321
Touchpad 51
Touchscreen 49
Towing 308
Tow-starting 308
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 171
Traction control 188
TRACTION driving mode, driving dynam-
ics 188
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 8
Transmission lock, releasing manually 137
Transmission, see Steptronic transmis-
sion 133
Transporting children safely 111
Tread, tires 269
Trip computer 154
Triple turn signal activation 125
Trip odometer 146
Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 146
Turning radius lines, rearview camera 205
Turn signal, front 296, 299
Turn signal, indicator light 144
Turn signal, side 302
Turn signals, operation 125
Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 301
U
Unintentional alarm 94
Units of measurement 57
Universal remote control 220
Unlocking, automatic 92
Unlocking, settings 91
Updates made after the editorial deadline 9
Upholstery care 314
USB connection 63
USB interface, position in vehicle 226
USB port, see USB interface 226
Use, intended 10
Using a smartphone via voice activation 53
V
Vanity mirror 224
Vehicle battery 302
Vehicle battery, replacing 303
Vehicle, break-in 240
Vehicle care 313
Vehicle care products 313
Vehicle features and options 9
Vehicle identification number 15
Vehicle jack 280
Vehicle key, see Remote control 76
Vehicle paint 314
Vehicle position, vehicle location 57
Vehicle status 160
Vehicle wash 313
Vehicle, washing 312
Ventilation 217
Venting, see Stationary climate control 218
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 15
Voice activation system 53
Voice command response, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 8
W
Warning and indicator lights, see Check
Control 142
Warning displays, see Check Control 142
Warning messages, see Check Control 142
Warning triangle 305
Warranty 10
Washer fluid 132
Washer nozzles, windshield 128, 131
Washing the vehicle 312
Water, hybrid system 73
Water on roads 241
Weights 321
Welcome lights 162
Welcome lights during unlocking 77
Wheel cleaner 314
Wheels, changing 271
Wheels, everything on wheels and
tires 266
Seite 335
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
335
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 176
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 171
Window defroster, rear 213, 217
Windows, powered 94
Windshield cleaning system 126, 129
Windshield defroster 213, 217
Windshield washer fluid 132
Windshield washer nozzles 128, 131
Windshield wipers, fold-away posi-
tion 128, 131
Windshield wipers, see Wiper sys-
tem 126, 129
Winter storage, care 316
Winter tires, suitable tires 272
Winter tires, tread 270
Wiper blades, replacing 294
Wiper fluid 132
Wiper system 126, 129
Wireless charging of a smartphone, see
Wireless charging tray, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 8
Wireless charging tray, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
cation 8
Wood, care 315
Word match concept, navigation 44
Working on the hybrid system 73
Wrench 294
Seite 336
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
336
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
01402723862 ue
*BL2723862004*
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
California Proposition 65
Warning
Online Version für Sach-Nr. 0140 - II/19
MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.
Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
01402723862 ue
*BL2723862004*
Online Edition for Part no. 01402723862 - VI/18
